Jeep Cherokee 2015 Owner's Manual – PDF Download
Jeep Cherokee 2015 Owner’s Manual | ManualsExpert
2015 Jeep Cherokee Owner’s Manual - Car Mechanic Workshop
2015
OWNER'S MANUAL
Cherokee
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
INTRODUCTION 5
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
1
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
INTRODUCTION 7
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side
of the engine block.
1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The VIN number also is stamped into the right front body, on the right front seat cross member (visible through an opening in the carpet) and appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
Vehicle Identification Number
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) -- If Equipped. .12 To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Key Fob -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .24
Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .25
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED . . .19 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .26
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED . .29 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GOTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Power Liftgate -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Remote Start Comfort Systems -- If Equipped . .33 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .52
Remote Start Windshield Wiper DeIcer Activation -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .65 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .116 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
2
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system consists of a either a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) -- If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
1 -- OFF 2 -- ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 -- ON/RUN 4 -- START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
2
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System)
1 -- OFF 2 -- ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 -- ON/RUN
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob -- If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM System)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver's door when the ignition is in ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition 2
to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster.
Emergency Key Removal (KIN System)
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
· Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
(Continued)
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the system. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
2
· Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of security protection.
· The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
· Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
· For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 2
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the "OFF" position (refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information).
· For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
· For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
· Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
· Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information).
· Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:
· Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
· Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (if equipped), refer to Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information.
· Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.
· For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM , press the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
· For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM , insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
· The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
· The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound.
· When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery 2
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors -- if equipped. Refer to "Mirrors" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
· The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome Defeat position (extreme top position).
· The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the "Dome defeat" position (extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the power liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless 2
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
· The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.
· You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
· Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
· Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal (if equipped) and gently prying the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart with the emergency key. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Remove Screw From Transmitter Case
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter Case
Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together.
General Information
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal 2
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
following conditions:
radios.
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· Hazard switch off
· The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
· Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:
· Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) · Ignition key removed from ignition switch · Battery at an acceptable charge level · RKE PANIC button not pushed · System not disabled from previous remote start event · Vehicle alarm system not active
· Gear Selector in PARK · Doors closed · Hood closed
· Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-GoTM vehicle
· Fuel level meets minimum requirement
· Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
· Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
· Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.
· Remote Start Aborted -- Hood Ajar
· Remote Start Aborted -- Fuel Low
· Remote Start Aborted -- Liftgate Ajar
2
· Remote Start Disabled -- Start Vehicle To Reset
· Remote Start Aborted -- Too Cold
· Remote Start Aborted -- Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) -- If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
· Remote Start Aborted -- Door Ajar
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
· The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
· For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
· The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP button. If the START/ STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
· For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGoTM feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
· For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-NGoTM feature, the message "Remote Start Active -- Insert Key and Turn To Run" will display in the EVIC/DID until you insert the key. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM feature, the message "Remote Start Active -- Push Start Button" will display in the EVIC/DID until you push the START button.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Remote Start Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver 2
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect® SETTINGS. For more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel."
Remote Start Windshield Wiper DeIcer Activation -- If Equipped
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the wiper De-Icer
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
will be enabled. On exiting remote start resume previous operation except, if the De-Icer is active, the De-Icer timer and operation will continue.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible.
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible) when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
· For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM (Passive Entry) system. For further information, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle".
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Place the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks -- If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in your radio.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission shift lever was not in PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the LOCK or UNLOCK position. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
· After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
· After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
· For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GOTM
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-GoTM. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
· Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
"Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel" for further information.
2
· If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
· If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press", refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry. There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter while a door is ajar.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" or "Unlock All Doors 1st Press").
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is ajar.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is ajar.
When any of these situations occur, after all ajar doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car and it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
· The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs
· There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle
· Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed in
EVIC/DID if equipped, all doors will unlock when you
push the electronic release on the liftgate. If Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press is programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic release
2
on the liftgate For further information, refer to
"Uconnect®" in "Understanding Your Instrument
Panel".
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location
To Lock The Vehicle's Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
· After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to 2
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
· If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect® System, the key protection described in Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter in Vehicle remains active/functional.
· The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button located on the vehicle's interior door panel.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows The window controls on the driver's door control all the door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Power Window Switches
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Push the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and 2
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
· If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button (setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button again (setting it in the UP position).
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof or Sky SliderTM open, adjust the sunroof or Sky SliderTM opening
2
to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof or Sky SliderTM (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed in EVIC/DID if equipped, all doors will unlock when you push the electronic release on the liftgate. If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in Uconnect®, the liftgate will unlock when you press the electronic release on the liftgate For further information, refer to "Uconnect®" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel".
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE: The liftgate passive entry lock button will only lock the liftgate, the liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE: Use the power door LOCK switch on either front door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate -- If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing the electronic liftgate release (refer to Keyless Enter-N-GoTM located in Things To Know Before Starting) or by pushing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the left side of
the steering wheel on the instrument panel, or closed by
pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. Push the LIFTGATE
2
button located on left rear trim panel once will close the
liftgate only, this button cannot be used to open the
liftgate.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect® settings) and the liftgate chime will be audible. For further information, refer to Uconnect® in Understanding Your Instrument Panel.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
NOTE:
· In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate trim panel.
· If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
· The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
· The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below -22°F (-30°C) or temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate switches.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.
· If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
· There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
· The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim, near the liftgate opening to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the liftgate, and then push it again to close.
· If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
· If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
· If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
· If your liftgate is power closing and you put the
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
2
WARNING!
· Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
· If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:
· Seat Belt Systems
· Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
· Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door and you could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front 2
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. · Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's or outboard front passenger's (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work 2
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. · In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. · It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
· Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
· Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
· A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
· A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
· A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
· A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
2
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
· A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
2
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
2
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant's body is LESS than 6 inches.
· Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Restraints" section of this manual. The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position.
2
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) -- If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
· The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
· Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions. · Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
2
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:
· Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
(Continued) · Air Bag Warning Light
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· Steering Wheel and Column · Instrument Panel · Knee Impact Bolsters · Advanced Front Air Bags · Supplemental Side Air Bags · Supplemental Knee Air Bags · Front and Side Impact Sensors · Seat Belt Pretenioners · Seat Belt Buckle Switch · Seat Track Position Sensors · Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 -- Driver Advanced Front Air Bag 2 -- Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
3 -- Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster 4 -- Supplemental Passenger Side Knee Air bag/Knee Bolster
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
WARNING!
· Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment 2
could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. · Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. · Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger Occupant Classification System ("OCS") that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant's seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
· No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
· Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk 2
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage -- for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) -- Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant's seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the following:
· Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
· Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor located in the front passenger seat
· Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger's most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
2
· The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or
· The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
· The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or
· The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Rear-facing child restraint
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Properly seated adult
Unoccupied seat
Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment OR Fullpower deployment
Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
· Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
· Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger's most probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
· Sitting upright
· Facing forward
· Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor
· Sitting with their back against the seatback and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger's seated weight on the front passenger seat
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front passenger's seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger's seated weight must be properly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger's decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
· The front passenger's weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel).
· The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
· The front passenger's seatback is not in the full upright position.
· The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
Decreasing the front passenger's seated weight on the · Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat. front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
· Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console.
· Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
· Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger's seated weight
The OCS determines the front passenger's most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant's properly seated weight input, for example:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
Not Seated Properly
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
· If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output 2
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant's properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury or death in a collision. · Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor. · Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant's properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system.
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only Chrysler Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
· Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.
· Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com- · Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front aftermarket seat cover or cushion. Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
· Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
· At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC .
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front 2
Air Bags.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
WARNING!
· Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.
· Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front and rear (in vehicles equipped with rear seat SABs) seats. The SABs are marked with a "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The SAB 2
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Rear Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
WARNING!
· Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.
· Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
The SABICs and SABs ("Side Air Bags") are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller ("ORC") de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
2
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
· Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
· Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
· Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
2
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
· The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
· As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
· Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
· After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
· Cut off fuel to the engine.
· Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
· Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
· Unlock the doors automatically.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition 2
OFF.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
· The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position.
· The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
· The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
The Redundant Warning Light will stay on until the fault
is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert
you that the Redundant Warning Light has come on and
a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driv-
2
ing have an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-
diately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Warning Light refer to the "Instrument Panel" section of this manual.
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System ("SRS"), the Redundant Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
· Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
· It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened.
· How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
· How fast the vehicle was traveling.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by 2
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
NOTE:
· For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1866SEATCHECK (7328243). Canadian resi-
dents should refer to Transport Canada's website for 2
additional information:
· www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING!
· Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front 2
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. · Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
· Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
· After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder 2
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not their stomach?
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child's squirming or slouching can move the seat belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing Child Restraint
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Combined Weight of the Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an "X" Below
LATCH Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top 2
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
2
· Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
· Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and
No
the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Can the head restraints be removed?
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
No
Never "share" a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints.
If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchor- 2
ages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Yes
The child seat may touch the back
of the front passenger seat if the
child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner's manual for more
information.
Yes
The head restraints may be re-
moved in every rear seating posi-
tion.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
2
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Tether Anchorage Locations
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D and E are used for the left outboard position behind the driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH--compatible child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH--compatible position in your vehicle
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH system at the same time. If you can fit three child restraints in your vehicle, you must use the seatbelt to install the center child restraint and you must use the LATCH anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You can use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belt for installing the third child seat in position (1) behind the front passenger.
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3): Install the child seats in the right and left outboard seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restraint an occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions (1 and 2): Install the first child seat in the right outboard seating position using lower anchorages A and B. Install the second child seat using the center anchorages, C and D. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the opposite door, E. Do not use the remaining left outboard seating position (3) for any occupant. The center child restraint will block the seat belt buckle for this position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
· Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating 2
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle. · A child restraint installed in the center position (2) will block the seat belt buckle for the empty left outboard seat behind the driver (3). Do not use this seat for another occupant. · Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint.
(Continued)
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
· If you are installing three child restraints next to each other, you must use the seat belt and the center tether anchor for the center position. You must use the LATCH anchors to install the child seat in position (3), behind the driver. You may use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belt for installing the child seat in position (1), behind the front passenger. Please refer to "Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System" for typical installation instructions.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt following the instructions below. See the section
"Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child 2
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
· Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be "switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the "Automatic Locking Mode" description under "Occupant Restraints."
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
2
· ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor · Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Yes
Can the head restraints be re-
Yes
moved?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
The head restraints may be removed in every rear seating posi-
tion.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click".
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt 2
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115
WARNING!
· An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the 2
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. · If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Tether Anchorage Locations
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle".
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
· Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon 2
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: · Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. · If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
· If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- 2
sonal injury. · Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners. · Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. · Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
· Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning.
· Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
· If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Inside Day/Night Mirror -- If Equipped . . . .130 Assist And 911 Rearview Mirror -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Power Folding Mirrors -- If Equipped. . . . . . .139 Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .140 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped . . .140
Sun Visor "Slide-On-Rod" Feature -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
3
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Power Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Manual Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . .154 Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . .156 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED . . . .162
Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .163 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .166 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . .169 Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) -- If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Fog Lights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .178 Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Windshield Wiper De-Icer -- If Equipped . . . .183 Rain Sensing Wipers -- If Equipped . . . . . . . .183 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .185 HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED . .186
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 3
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .194 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .195 To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .201 Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .206 Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .207 Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .210 General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .222 FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .224 LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .240
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .241
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .256
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .257
Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .258 3
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .258
PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active Park Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .241
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .288
Closing Sunroof -- Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .289 Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .300
Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Venting Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .292 Opening Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . .300
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .293 Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . .301
Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Closing Power Shade -- Express . . . . . . . . . . .301
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode . . . . . .301
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Opening Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .299
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .302 POWER INVERTER -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .306
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD -- IF EQUIPPED . .308
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Cargo Extension Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Wireless Charging Pad Operation . . . . . . . . . .309 Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops . . . . . . . .316
CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Retractable Cargo Area Cover -- If Equipped . .318
STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Rear Storage Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 3
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Flip 'n StowTM Front Passenger Seat Storage -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED . . . .322
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror -- If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Assist And 911 Rearview Mirror -- If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
Assist And 911 Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9-1-1 button.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The ASSIST and 911 features operate through the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is active. Refer to your "Uconnect® System supplement manual" for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:
· Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just press the Assist button and you'll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you're driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
· Uconnect® Access Customer Care In-vehicle support for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via Mobile features.
· Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator:
· Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
· The vehicle brand.
· The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to 3
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle's electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
· The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
· The Phone Screen will display the following message "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."
· An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer."
3
WARNING!
· Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
· The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the air bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors beyond Chrysler Group LLC's control may prevent or stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:
· Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator. · Wireless network congestion. · Weather.
· The ignition key has been removed from the ignition and the delayed accessories mode is active.
· The ignition key is in OFF position.
· The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.
· The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash.
· Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle's wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
· The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
· Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
· Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to 3
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
Models With Express Window Feature
The power mirror switches are located on the driver's door trim panel.
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing. The selection will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position following an adjustment.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Power Mirror Switches
1 -- Mirror Direction Control 2 -- Left And Right Mirror Select
Models Without Express Window Feature
Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Power Folding Mirrors -- If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors
3
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs:
· The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
· The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/ unfolded.
· The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
· The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor "Slide-On-Rod" Feature -- If Equipped
The sun visor "Slide-On-Rod" feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)
· The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
· The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.
3
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicles mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible 3
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/ Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
3
· It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats -- If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up, down, forward or rearward.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward. Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
Power Seat Recliner Switch
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar -- If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
Power Lumbar Switch
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seats -- If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
· Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.
· Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Front Seat Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
Recline Lever
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment -- If Equipped
Front Heated Seats -- If Equipped
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
The front heated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the heated seat button once to turn the High setting ON.
· Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the Low setting ON.
· Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.
Seat Height Adjustment
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care 3
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. · Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGH and LOW.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the ventilated seat button HIGH.
once to choose
· Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LOW.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Reactive Head Restraints -- Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
3
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the release button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
Release Button
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
The rear head restraints have two positions UP and DOWN. When the center seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the release button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
3
WARNING!
Release Button
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room.
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of the seat near the floor and release it when the seat is at the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper outer edge of the seat or pull the pull strap located on the middle outer edge of the seat.
Rear Seatback Release Lever And Pull Strap 2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Recliner Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger comfort. Pull on the pull strap while sitting in the rear seat to recline the seatback.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
Rear Seat Recliner Pull Strap
WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of desired radio station presets.
The memory switch is located on the driver's side door panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to activate the memory save function, the number (1) memory button and the number (2) memory button. The memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate number button on the switch.
Driver Memory Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory switch, then press the number (1) button within five seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will display which memory position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into memory as follows:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the number (2) button within five
seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory position is being set.
3
NOTE:
· For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
· For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall a memory profile.
· To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer to "Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory" in this section.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the "Memory To FOB" feature through the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to Programming The Memory Feature in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory switch, then within five seconds press and release the button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. "Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
· For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
· For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a
recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A
delay of one second will occur before another recall can
be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
3
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
· When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seat will return to its previously set position when you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
· The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the drivers side of the instrument panel.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull the safety latch release lever forward (toward you). The safety latch release lever is located behind the center front edge of the hood.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless 3
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights -- if equipped, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights -- if equipped.
Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
3
tures" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
· The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature.
· The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
· The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera 2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
· To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv- NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
To Deactivate
3
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon 1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
ignition off.
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp operation of low beams).
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed 2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized reactivate the system.
dealer.
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) -- If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the engine is shut Off.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.
Fog Lights -- If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
Multifunction Lever
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
· If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
· A "Turn Signal On" message will appear in the EVIC/ DID and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
· When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn
signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console. To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned completely upward to the second detent.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
There are courtesy lights located above the front seats. The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders -- if equipped.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the instrument panel.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light Control -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Dome Light Position
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down- Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi- upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
ent light located in the overhead console, door handle The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and panel dimmer control is in this position.
cubby bin lights.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
3
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the "park" position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the "park" 3
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
3
Windshield Washer Operation
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Windshield Wiper De-Icer -- If Equipped
resume previous operation except, if the Windshield
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper Wiper De-Icer timer and operation shall continue.
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following Rain Sensing Wipers -- If Equipped
conditions:
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
· Activation By Front Defrost -- The Windshield Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
3
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, the from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
blower speed level is greater than 5, and when the the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
to activate this feature.
· Activation By Rear Defrost -- The Windshield Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
· Activation By Remote Start Operation -- When remote start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer shall be enabled. On exiting remote start
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
· The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
· Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
· The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:
· Low Ambient Temperature -- When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
· Transmission In NEUTRAL Position -- When the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit -- On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To lock the steering column in position, push the control heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
handle upward until fully engaged.
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
· Press the heated steering wheel button turn the heating element ON.
once to
· Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
(Continued)
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 -- ON/OFF 2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME
4 -- SET-/DECEL 5 -- CANCEL
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition 3
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then
WARNING!
the new set speed will be established.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
To Accelerate For Passing
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
3
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
· If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
· If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
· The ACC system: · Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.
· Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
· Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within 3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system: · When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING! (Continued)
· When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes. · When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
3
· When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
· Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
· Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
(Continued)
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 -- NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF 2 -- SET+/ACCEL 3 -- RESUME 4 -- SET-/DECEL 5 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- INCREASE 6 -- ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF 7 -- DISTANCE SETTING -- DECREASE 8 -- CANCEL
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) displays "ACC Ready."
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
· When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
· When you apply the brakes.
· When the parking brake is set.
3
· When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
· When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
· When the brakes are overheated.
· When the driver door is open.
· When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID displays "ACC Ready."
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will display "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET + button or the SET - button and release. The EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
· The message "DRIVER OVERRIDE" will display in 3
the EVIC/DID.
· The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
· The brake pedal is applied.
· The CANCEL button is pressed.
· An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the · The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Drive position.
ON/OFF button is pressed.
· The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
· The vehicle parking brake is applied. · Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds. · Driver door is opened at low speeds. · A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs. · The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Turn Off The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:
· The ignition is turned OFF.
· You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
· If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds, then the driver will either have to press the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
· The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button · ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
is pressed.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will 3
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pressing the SET + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET - button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID.
NOTE:
· When you override and push the SET + button or SET - buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.
· When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the engine's braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
· The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds the driver will either have to press the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
· The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
3
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance Setting -- Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the 3
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the "Sensed Vehicle Indicator" icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setting -- Increase button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
· The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
· The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The distance setting is changed.
· The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert "BRAKE" will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The "Brake!" Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location with left hand drive traffic.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
3
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver will either have to press the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system settings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
· Distance Setting Change
· System Cancel
· Driver Override
· System Off
· ACC Proximity Warning
· ACC Unavailable Warning
· The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
"Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle" Warning The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
"ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" and
the system will deactivate.
3
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille.
· Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
· Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the "Adaptive Cruise Control Off" state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
· Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.
· If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
· If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
· Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
"Clean Front Windshield" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" and the system will have degraded performance.
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message can sometimes be displayed while
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should 3
examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Offset Driving
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays "ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required"or "Cruise/ FCW Unavailable Service Required", there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
3
Turn Or Bend Example
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
3
Narrow Vehicle Example
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since 3
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID display.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Decrease Speed
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET + button.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
U.S. Speed (mph)
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
· Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
· The brake pedal is applied.
· The CANCEL button is pressed.
· The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
· The vehicle parking brake is applied.
3
· The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
· If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC/DID display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the memory:
· The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
· The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button is pressed.
· The ignition is turned off.
· You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
· The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is pressed.
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
3
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
· The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h).
· The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
· It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
· The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
NOTE: The default status of FCW is "On", this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The forward collision button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
· Changing the FCW status to "Off" prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
· Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible warns the driver later.
collision
earlier
and
Near
3
Forward Collision Button To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns off).
· Changing the Active Braking status to "Off" prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The default status of FCW is the "Far" setting and the Active Braking is the "On" setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the "Near" setting, allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the "Far" setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
· The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
· FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
· FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality" or "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
· ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
· Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn- 3
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the driver's hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the driver when the driver's hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is "OFF".
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
LaneSense Warning Button
To turn the LaneSense system ON, press the LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED turns off). A "Lane Sense On" message is shown in the EVIC/DID.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, press the LaneSense button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
3
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
Lane Sense On Message
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3.5 EVIC Screen -- If Equipped
Left Lane Departure -- Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the EVIC if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Left Lane Departure -- Both Lanes Detected
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is "armed" to provide visual
3
warnings in the EVIC and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
· When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid white. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
3
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line, Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7.0 DID Screen -- If Equipped
Left Lane Departure -- Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Left Lane Departure -- Both Lanes Detected
· When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is "armed" to provide visual
3
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
· When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
· When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
· For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
3
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE:
· When enabled the system operates above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
· Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
· The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.).
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-
tected obstacle. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" for
further information.
3
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs -- Left
Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right Audible Alert Chime
Radio Volume Reduced
Greater than 79 in
(200 cm) None
None
None
None
No
79-59 in (200-150 cm)
None
6th Solid
None
Single 1/2Second Tone (for rear cen-
ter only) Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in (150-120 cm)
47-39 in (120-100
cm)
39-25 in (100-65
cm)
25-12 in (65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
None
5th Solid
None
Slow (for rear cen-
ter only)
Yes
None
4th Solid
None
Slow (for rear center
only) Yes
None
3rd Flashing None
Fast (for rear center
only) Yes
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Yes
1st
3
Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® Switch
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC/DID will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" 3
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
· Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.
· When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
· When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC/ DID will display "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
· ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
· Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ bumper.
· Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the EVIC/DID.
· ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
· ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, 3
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
· Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
· The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense® off via ParkSense® switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.
· Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not available.
· Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense® Park Assist system or the Braking System Module.
· The automatic braking function may only be applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual Transmission, the automatic braking function in REVERSE gear is not available.
· The automatic braking function may not be applied fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
· The automatic braking function can be enabled/ disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System.
· ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state for the automatic braking function through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
· The driver is always responsible for controlling the 3
vehicle.
· The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.
· The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE (NON-REVERSE for manual transmission). If ParkSense® is enabled at one of these shift lever positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear in the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ParkSense® Active Park Assist System section for further information.
The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/ bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System. Refer to Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or 7 Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
ParkSense® Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing 3
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs -- Left
Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right Audible Alert Chime
Greater than
79 in (200 cm) None
None
None
None
Radio Vol-
No
ume Re-
duced
79-59 in (200-150 cm)
None
6th Solid
None
Single 1/2Second Tone (for rear cen-
ter only) Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in (150-120 cm)
47-39 in (120-100
cm)
39-25 in (100-65
cm)
25-12 in (65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in
(30 cm)
None
None
None
2nd Flash- 1st Flash- 3
ing
ing
5th Solid
4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flash-
ing
ing
ing
None
None
None
2nd Flash- 1st Flash-
ing
ing
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continu-
(for rear cen- (for rear (for rear
ous
ter only)
center
center
only)
only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE or NON-REVERSE for manual transmission, the ParkSense® Warning screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the display will show a single arc in the center front region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone when the 1st flashing arc appears.
No Tone/Solid Arc
No Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
3
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Front Distance (in/cm)
Arcs -- Left
Arcs -- Center
Arcs -- Right
Audible Alert Chime
Radio Volume Reduced
Greater than 47 in (120 cm)
None None None None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in (120-100 cm)
39-25 in (100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No
No
25-12 in (65-30 cm) 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing
Fast
Yes
Less than 12 in (30 cm) 1st Flashing
1st Flashing 3
1st Flashing Continuous
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
ParkSense® Switch
When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the
"PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and requires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds. When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic Vehicle 3
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) will display a PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with UNAVAILABLE at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS,
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.
If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
· Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
· Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.
· When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF." Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
· When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
· ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
· Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
· Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE 3
SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
· ParkSense® should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
· There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking application to be delayed.
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is intended to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is defined as "semi-automatic" since the driver maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is 3
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
· The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and must intervene as required.
· The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.
· During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver will be required to manually complete the parking maneuver.
· The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active Park Assist System
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect® display.
· New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30 miles accumulated before the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to the system's dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the performance of the feature. The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
ParkSense® Active Park Assist Switch
To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system, press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system, press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns off).
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will turn off automatically for any of the following conditions:
· The parking maneuver is completed.
· Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when searching for a parking space.
· Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
· Pressing the ParkSense® Front and Rear Park Assist switch.
· Driver's door is opened.
· Rear liftgate is opened.
· Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System 3
intervention.
· The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC/ DID will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
· Touching the steering wheel during active steering guidance into the parking space.
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will only operate and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:
· Gear position is in DRIVE (automatic transmission) or in a forward gear (manual transmission).
· Ignition is in the RUN position.
· ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch is activated.
· Driver's door is closed.
· Rear liftgate is closed.
· Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by pressing the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch.
· The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.
When pressed, the LED on the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/ Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is enabled the "Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular" message will appear in the EVIC/DID display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to change your parking space setting.
NOTE:
· When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
· The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
· The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/ clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
· When seeking for a parking space, the driver should 3
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
· The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver).
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Active ParkSense Searching
When an available parking space has been found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking sequence.
Space Found -- Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop the vehicle's movement and remove your hands from the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
3
Space Found -- Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
Space Found -- Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings -- Move Backward NOTE:
· It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
· When the system instructs the driver to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
· The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC/ DID will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
· If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicle's movement.
3
· The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
Check Surroundings -- STOP
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings -- Shift To Drive
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
3
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings -- Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicle's movement.
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings -- STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings -- Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward.
3
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings -- Move Backward
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. The Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position message will be momentarily displayed.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is enabled, the "Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular" message will show in the EVIC/DID display. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver presses OK for a perpendicular parking maneuver, the "Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to Switch to Parallel" message will appear in the EVIC/DID display.
Active ParkSense Complete -- Check Parking Position
Active ParkSense Searching Display
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
NOTE:
· When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side
3
of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
· The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
· The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/ clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· When seeking for a parking space, the driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
· The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking sequence.
Space Found -- Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop the vehicle's movement and remove your hands from the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
3
Space Found -- Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Space Found -- Shift To Reverse
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings -- Move Backward
NOTE:
· It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
· When the system instructs the driver to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
· The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE (automatic transmission) or forward gear (manual transmission) and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the EVIC/ DID will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
· The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled. 3
· If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicle's movement.
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings -- STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings -- Shift To Drive
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move forward.
3
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings -- Move Forward
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward movement, the system will instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the vehicle's movement.
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will be instructed to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings -- STOP
Check Surroundings -- Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
The system will then instruct the driver to check their surroundings and move backward.
3
Check Surroundings -- Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings -- Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position. When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
shift to PARK. The Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position message will be momentarily displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete -- Check Parking Position
CAUTION!
· The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/ her shoulder when using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system.
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
WARNING! (Continued)
· Before using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
3
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Zone Red Yellow Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
3
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
· To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle's battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN 3
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
· Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
· If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 -- Door Opener
2 -- Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
3
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you would like to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
· If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
· To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Non -- Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Non-Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to "time-out" after
3
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.
NOTE:
· If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
· To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. and observe the indicator light.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions:
· Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
· Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
· Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
that has a "stop and reverse" feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
(Continued)
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
· The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switches are located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console.
3
· The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switches
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power shade switches are located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
· Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
· In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof -- Express
A comfort stop position and full open position are the programmed automatic stops for the sunroof open positions. The comfort stop position has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to the comfort stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half open position prior to the sunroof opening). Press the switch rearward and release it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
and automatically stop. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof -- Manual Mode
A comfort stop position is a programmed automatic stop for the sunroof open position. The comfort stop position
3
has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting.
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward. The sunroof will stop automatically at the comfort stop position (if the sunshade is in the closed position when the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half open position prior to the sunroof opening). Press and hold the switch rearward again, the sunroof will open to the full open position and automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing Sunroof -- Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof -- Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.
Venting Sunroof -- Express
Press and release the Vent button within one-half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.
Opening Power Shade -- Express
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the shade will automatically open to the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the switch a second time from the halfway position and the shade will automatically open to the full open position and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
Opening Power Shade -- Manual Mode
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward. The shade will open and stop automatically at the half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely.
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.
Closing Power Shade -- Manual Mode
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
3
Closing Power Shade -- Express
again.
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the shade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the shade.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.
Ignition OFF Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/ Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a "key" or a "battery" symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a "key" are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a "battery" are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on the center stack of the instrument panel.
NOTE:
· All accessories connected to the "battery" powered
3
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
· To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR® knob and element must be used.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet has power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
NOTE: The rear power outlet can be switched to "battery" powered all the time by moving the rear power outlet fuse in the fuse panel. Refer to your local authorized Jeep Dealer for further details.
Rear Power Outlet
Rear Power Outlet Fuse
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
· Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
· Do not touch with wet hands.
3
· Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
· If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 -- F75 Fuse 20A Yellow Front Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter Console Bin 2 -- F92 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet 3 -- F60 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
· Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
· After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
POWER INVERTER -- IF EQUIPPED
Power Inverter Location There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in the device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
· Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
· Do not touch with wet hands.
· Close the lid when not in use.
3
· If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD -- IF EQUIPPED
your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless charging, be equipped with an aftermarket sleeve or equipped with a back plate from your mobile phone provider, or an online or local electronics retailer.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE: Visit UconnectPhone.com for supported mobile phones and compatible aftermarket sleeves.
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless charging pad located inside the upper portion of the center console. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
Wireless Charging Pad Operation
To use the wireless charging pad, the coil in your mobile
phone needs to align with the coil in the charging pad,
which is located directly under the Qi logo. Since each
mobile phone's coil location is different, you may need a
few attempts to locate the correct spot for your mobile
3
phone:
1. Place your mobile phone on the wireless charging pad, towards the Qi logo, so that the LED turns red. If the LED does not turn red, pick up the mobile phone and change the location.
2. Once the LED transitions from red to flashing green, your mobile phone is correctly placed and charging.
Mobile Phone Alignment
NOTE: The mobile phone must be aligned around the Qi logo for the LED to transition from red to flashing green.
3. If the LED does not transition from red to flashing green, and just turns off, pick up your mobile phone and reposition it on the charging pad.
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Adjust the wireless charging pad mobile phone cradle to hold the mobile phone in position. The cradle moves by pushing down on the finger tabs and adjusting the cradle in or out.
NOTE: The initial adjustment will only need to be done once as long as only one mobile phone is used. If a different mobile phone is used, the cradle will need to be readjusted.
The LED indicator will flash green while the mobile phone is charging. The Qi enabled phone is able to function normally as it is charging.
CAUTION!
Do not place your vehicle Key Fob on the wireless charging pad, the Keyless Enter-N-GoTM feature may not work properly while a mobile phone is being charged.
Adjustable Mobile Phone Charging Pad Cradle
WARNING!
Do not place metal object(s) between the mobile phone and wireless charging pad. Metal object(s) such as coins, rings or keys will become very HOT. If metal object(s) become lodged between the mobile phone and wireless charging pad, carefully remove the mobile phone and allow the metal object(s) to cool before removing. Failure to wait until the object(s) cool could result in personal injury, including burns.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers, located in the center console.
3
Front Cupholders
312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers, STORAGE
located in the center armrest.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passengers side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the latch to open the glove compartment.
There is also an additional storage bin located above the instrument panel in the center of the dash.
Rear Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313
3
Glove Compartment Console Storage Compartment
Upper Console Charging Pad To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
Some vehicles may be equipped with a wireless charging pad located in the upper portion of the center console. Refer to Wireless Charging Pad-If Equipped in this section for more information.
314 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Center Console
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small items.
Center Console Storage
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
Flip 'n StowTM Front Passenger Seat Storage -- If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with storage under the front passenger seat cushion. Pull upward on the seat cushion loop to open the storage compartment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 315
3
Passenger Seat Cushion Loop
Passenger Seat Cushion Storage Compartment
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it latches to the base.
316 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lbs (181 kg).
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room. Refer to "Seats" in this section for further information.
Cargo Extension Panels
Cargo extension panels can be folded and unfolded. When the rear seats are moved to the more forward positions and the rear seat backs are folded down, the extension panels can be unfolded manually by hand (2 of them). The extension panels can be used to extend the load floor to the rear seats and/or hide the gap between the load floor and rear seats, or to assist in loading large items into the cargo area.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
WARNING!
· Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
· To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 317
WARNING! (Continued)
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
· Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or
3
left door center pillar.
· Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
· Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
· Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
318 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Retractable Cargo Area Cover -- If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo.
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert the right spring-loaded post (located on the end of the cover housing) into the right attachment points.
Then, insert on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover
Next, grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the
notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle.
WARNING!
In a collision, a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle on the sides of the load floor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 319
3
Rear Storage Bins
320 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper/Washer The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the "park" position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the switch bank by the manual climate controls. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors. An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 321
NOTE:
· The Windsheild Wiper De-Icer (if equipped) shall be
activated automatically when the Rear Defrost is
turned on and when the ambient temperature is below
40 degrees F (4.4° C).
3
· To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
322 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on vehicles equipped with Skyslider®.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at a Chrysler dealer through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
CAUTION!
· To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
· Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
· Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.
· Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 323
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack 3
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .328 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID). . . . . .362
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- BASE . . . . . . . . . .329 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- PREMIUM . . . . . .330
Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 4
DID Red Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .331 DID Yellow Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 EVIC Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 EVIC Yellow Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings -- Uconnect® 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . .386
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect® 8.4 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Uconnect® RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .421
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED . .422
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .445
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .424 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .425
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . .460 Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464 SiriusXM Travel LinkTM (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .465 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 -- Air Demister Outlet
5 -- Instrument Cluster
2 -- Air Outlet
6 -- Electronic Speed Control
3 -- Electronic Vehicle Information 7 -- Storage Compartment
Center (EVIC)/ Driver Information
Display (DID) Controls
4 -- Horn/Driver Air Bag
8 -- Radio
9 -- Passenger Air Bag 10 -- Glove Compartment 11 -- Lower Switch Bank
13 -- Stop/Start Ignition Button 14 -- Liftgate Release Button 15 -- Dimmer Switches
12 -- Uconnect® Hard Controls/ 16 -- Headlight Switch Climate Controls/Electric Stop Start -- If Equipped
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- BASE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- PREMIUM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). 2. High Beam Indicator
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
3. Front Fog Light Indicator -- If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. 4. Park/Headlight ON Indicator -- If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
5. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
4
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
6. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display 4
shows the EVIC/DID messages. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID" as equipped located in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel."
7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
8. ECO Light
This light is activated via hard button on the center stack to display your driving habits.
9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light -- If Equipped
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
· The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
· Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
11. Speedometer
Indicates Digital Speedometer (MPH or km/h).
12. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
4
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant
Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle" for further information.
13. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
14. Turn Signal Indicator
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will chime, and an EVIC/DID message will appear if either turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.
15. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
4
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
17. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see "Maintaining Your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle". Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
18. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set. The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)
The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of eight sections:
1. Electronic Park Brake Failure -- If Equipped
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized dealer for assistance.
2. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
4
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
3. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for more information.
4. EVIC Display Area
The EVIC display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The EVIC display area also displays "pop up" messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories:
· Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the "Messages" main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an "i" will be displayed in the EVIC's compass/outside temp line. Examples of this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out" and "Low Tire Pressure".
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
· Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a turn signal is left on) and "Lights On" (if driver leaves the vehicle).
· Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start 4
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are "Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar" and "Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start".
· Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this message type is "Automatic High Beams On".
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. LaneSense -- If Equipped
6. Fuel Gauge
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
· When the LaneSense system is ON and ready the lane lines and LaneSense indicator are the color gray.
· When the LaneSense system is armed, the lane lines change to white and the LaneSense indicator changes to green.
· When the LaneSense system senses a lane cross situation, the approaching lane line and the LaneSense indicator change from white to yellow.
For further information, refer to "Lanesense -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. 7. Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added. 8. Rear Axle Lock Indicator -- If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.
9. Reconfigurable Yellow Telltale Display · Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may also occur when operating
the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel drive operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
· Low Coolant Level Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.
· Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
windshield washer fluid is low.
4
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle".
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· LaneSense Service -- If Equipped This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Lane Sense Departure has detected a failure.
11. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
This displays the set speed of the Electronic Speed Control.
· Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel filler cap is loose.
10. Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed Warning Telltale -- If Equipped
This area displays the Manual Speed Assist (MSA) speed warning telltale.
12. Reconfigurable Telltale Area
· Hill Descent Indicator -- If Equipped The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the 4WD Low switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position (Off-Road Mode).
· Selec Speed Control Indicator -- If Equipped The symbol illuminates and is active only in 4WD Low range when either the HDC switch on the instrument panel is selected or ROCK mode for Selec-Terrain is selected.
If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following message is displayed "Selec-Speed Unavailable".
· Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON. For further information, refer to "Electronic Speed Control" in "Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle".
· Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. For further information, refer to "Electronic Speed Control" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
13. Reconfigurable Red Telltale Display
· Power Steering System Over Temperature -- If Equipped
If the "POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP" message and a icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
in the power steering system. You will lose power
steering assistance momentarily until the over tem-
perature condition no longer exists. Once driving
conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle.
After five minutes, the system will cool and return to
normal operation. Refer to "Power Steering" in
"Starting and Operating" for further information.
NOTE:
4
· Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
· If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.
· Liftgate Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate may be ajar.
· Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when
the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
· Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".
· Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
· Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil tempera-
ture is high. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible.
· Secondary Air Bag Warning Light
4
If the light turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Re-
straints" in "Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle" for further information.
14. 4WD LOW Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use, refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating".
15. SERV 4WD Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in need of service. If this light is illuminated, see your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
16. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see "Maintaining Your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle". Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Due" message will display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times 4
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These telltales include:
· Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".
· Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for more information.
· Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.
· Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
· Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. 4
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light
· Liftgate Open Warning Light
This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service.
This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
· Air Bag Warning Light
EVIC Yellow Telltales
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information. · Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution telltales. These telltales include: · Forward Collision Telltale
This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
· Service Stop/Start System Telltale -- If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/ Start system is not functioning properly and service is required.
· Service Adaptive Cruise Control Telltale
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
· Transmission Over Temperature Telltale -- If Equipped
This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
· Service 4WD Telltale
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is re- 4
quired. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
· Diesel Wait To Start Telltale -- If Equipped
The "Wait To Start" telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition is turned to the RUN position. It's duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is out. Refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· LaneSence Failure Telltale
· Diesel water In Fuel Telltale -- If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
· Diesel Low Diesel Exhaust Telltale -- If Equipped This telltale will turn on to indicate the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is low
The "Water In Fuel Indicator Light" will illuminate when there is water detected in the fuel filters. If this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain the water from the fuel filters to prevent engine damage. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures/Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filters" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
· rear Axle Locker Telltale
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.
· Loose Fuel Filler Cap
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the fuel filler cap may be loose.
· Washer Fluid Telltale
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the EVIC.
Speedometer
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow "Tire Pressure" is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and
button until the Speedometer Menu item is release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
highlighted in the EVIC. Push the OK button to will be displayed:
change the speedometer to km/h (or vice versa).
scale
from
mph
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON.
4
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
If one or more tires have low pressure, "Inflate Tire To
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until XX" is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
through the Vehicle Info sub-menus, follow the prompts color than the other tire pressure value.
on each screen as needed.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, "Service Tire
Pressure System" is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" under "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
Transmission Temp
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Oil Temp
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Driver Assist Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the EVIC:
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
· Distance Setting Change
· System Cancel
· Driver Override
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
LaneSense
The EVIC displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to be met. For further information, refer to "LaneSense -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· System Off
Fuel Economy
4
· ACC Proximity Warning · ACC Unavailable Warning
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted. Push and Hold the OK button to reset feature.
· The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· Range · Average Fuel Economy · Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information will display the following:
· Distance
· Average Fuel Economy
· Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Upper Left · Compass · Outside Temp (default setting) · Time · Range To Empty (RTE) · Average MPG or L/100 km · Current MPG or L/100 km · None Upper Right · Compass (default setting) · Outside Temp · Time
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
· Range To Empty (RTE)
· Average MPG or L/100 km
· Current MPG or L/100 km
· None
Center
· Menu Title (Default Setting)
4
· Compass
· Outside Temp
· Time
· Range To Empty
· Average MPG or L/100 km
· Current MPG or L/100 km
· Trip A
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Trip B · Audio Information · None Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings) · OK · Cancel
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections:
1. LaneSense-- If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
· When LaneSense system is ON and ready the lane lines and LaneSense indicator are the color gray.
· When LaneSense system is armed, the lane lines change to white and the LaneSense indicator changes to green.
· When LaneSense system senses a lane cross situation, the approaching lane line and the LaneSense indicator change from white to yellow.
For further information, refer to "LaneSense-- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
2. DID Selectable Display Area
This area displays selectable information (Compass, Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG or L/100 km).
3. Electronic Park Brake Failure
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized dealer for assistance.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
4. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
4
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
WARNING! (Continued)
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
5. Driver Information Display (DID)
The DID display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The DID display area also displays "pop up" messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories:
· Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
and can be reviewed from the "Messages" main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an "i" will be displayed in the middle of the DID's top line. Examples of this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out" and "Low Tire Pressure".
· Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared. 4
Examples of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a turn signal is left on) and "Lights On" (if driver leaves the vehicle).
· Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are "Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar" and "Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start".
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this message type is "Automatic High Beams On".
6. Manual Speed Assist (MSA) Speed Warning Telltale -- If Equipped
This area displays the Manual Speed Assist (MSA) speed warning telltale.
7. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
This displays the set speed of the Electronic Speed Control.
8. DID Selectable Display Area
This area displays selectable information (Compass, Temp, Range to Empty, Trip, Average MPG or L/100 km).
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefor, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
9. Reconfigurable Telltale Area
· Hill Descent Indicator -- If Equipped The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the 4WD Low switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position (Off-Road Mode).
· Selec Speed Control Indicator -- If Equipped The symbol illuminates and is active only in 4WD Low range when either the HDC switch on the instrument panel is selected or ROCK mode for Selec-Terrain is selected.
If the T-case is not in 4WD Low range, the following message is displayed "Selec-Speed Unavailable".
· Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON. For further information, refer to "Electronic Speed Control" in "Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle".
· Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. For further information, refer to "Electronic Speed Control" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system. For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
10. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
4
The shift lever status "P,R,N,D,L,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1" are dis-
played indicating the shift lever position. Refer to "Start-
ing And Operating".
11. Instructional Area
This area will display text to the visual warnings (i.e., "Push Brake To Start").
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Amber Reconfigurable Telltale Display · Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
· Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
· Rear Axle Lock Indicator -- If Equipped This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.
· Low Coolant Level Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.
· Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
· 4WD LOW Indicator Light -- If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
For further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use, refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating".
· SERV 4WD Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in need of
service. If this light is illuminated, see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
4
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle".
· LaneSense Service -- If Equipped This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Lane Sense Departure has detected a failure.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel filler cap is loose.
13. Odometer Display/Fuel Gauge/Temperature Gauge/ Submenu Area
· The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the
odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Driver Information Display (DID) messages and Submenus.
· Fuel Gauge Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
· Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
WARNING! (Continued)
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see "Maintaining Your Vehicle". Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
14. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display
· Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for more information.
· Power Steering System Over Temperature -- If Equipped
If the "POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP" message and a icon are displayed on the DID screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system will cool and return to normal operation. Refer to "Power Steering" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
NOTE:
· Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
· If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service. · Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.
· Liftgate Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate may be ajar.
· Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when
the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
· Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".
· Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) sys-
4
tem. The light will come on when the
ignition is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
· Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
· Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Due" message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
DID Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These telltales include:
· Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential 4
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Engine Temperature Warning Light
· Door Ajar
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for more information.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.
· Oil Pressure Warning Light
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
· Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
· Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light
This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service.
· Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
4
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints"
in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for
further information.
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Oil Temperature Warning Light
· Service Stop/Start System Telltale -- If Equipped
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. · Liftgate Open Warning Light
This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
DID Yellow Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution telltales. These telltales include: · Forward Collision Telltale
This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/ Start system is not functioning properly and service is required.
· Service Adaptive Cruise Control Telltale
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
· Transmission Over Temperature Telltale -- If Equipped
This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
· Service 4WD Telltale
If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
· Diesel Wait To Start Telltale -- If Equipped
The "Wait To Start" telltale will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the ignition is
turned to the RUN position. It's duration may be longer
based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not
initiate start until telltale is out. Refer to "Starting Proce-
dures" in "Starting information.
and
Operating"
for
further 4
· LaneSence Failure Telltale
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
· Diesel Low Diesel Exhaust Telltale -- If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is low
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· rear Axle Locker Telltale
· Loose Fuel Filler Cap
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the fuel filler cap may be loose.
· Washer Fluid Telltale
DID Selectable Menu Items
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind- Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
shield washer fluid is low.
the desired Selectable Menu item is highlighted in the
DID.
· Diesel water In Fuel Telltale -- If Equipped
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
The "Water In Fuel Indicator Light" will illuminate when there is water detected in the fuel filters. If this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain the water from the fuel filters to prevent engine damage. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures/Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filters" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Speedometer Menu item is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the OK button to change the speedometer scale from mph to km/h (or vice versa).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info Menu item is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT/LEFT arrow button to cycle through the Vehicle Info sub-menus, follow the prompts on each screen as needed.
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until "Tire Pressure" is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following will be displayed:
· If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON.
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value.
· If the Tire Pressure system requires service, "Service Tire Pressure System" is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return 4
to the main menu.
Refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" under "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temp
Oil Temp
· If one or more tires have low pressure, "Inflate Tire To Oil Life XX" is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire Battery Voltage
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Assist
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off."
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready."
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
· Distance Setting Change
· System Cancel
· Driver Override
· System Off
· ACC Proximity Warning
· ACC Unavailable Warning
· The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
LaneSense
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to be met. For further information, refer to "LaneSense -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID. Push and Hold the OK button to reset feature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
· Range · Average Fuel Economy · Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km) Trip Info Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left 4
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information will display the following: · Distance · Average Fuel Economy · Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
4
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On Faceplate
1 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate 2 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen 1 -- Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and Back buttons located below the system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings -- Uconnect® 5.0 Settings
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety & Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/ Bluetooth®, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, and Clear Personal Data.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting and make your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Display Mode
When in this display you may select the "Auto" or "Manual" display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the "Auto" or "Manual" button on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
· Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the overall screen
brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness
with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+"
and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow
back button on the touchscreen.
4
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with
Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
parade positions.
· Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
· Units
When in this display, you may select to have the DID, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed between US and Metric units of measure. Press "US" or "Metric" to make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Set Language
· Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the "Set Language" button on the touchscreen, then select the desired language button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is pressed. Press the "Touchscreen Beep" button on the touchscreen then select from "on" or "off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Voice
· Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the "Voice Response Length" button on the touchscreen and select from "Brief" or "Detailed." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List settings, press the "Show Command List" button on the touchscreen and select from "Always," "With Help" or "Never." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Clock & Date
After pressing the "Clock" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Set Time
When in this display, you may set the time and format manually. Press the "Set Time" button then choose from
a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the corresponding 4
arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select AM or PM. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Set Date
When in this display, you may set the date manually. Press the "Set Date" button then press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the "Safety/Assistance" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense® status, press and release the "Sound Only" or "Sounds and Display" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to "ParkSense®" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.
· Tilt Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever/gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Mirrors In Reverse" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check
entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection, press the "ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE" unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
ParkView® Backup Camera Delay push the MORE button on the faceplate, the "settings" button on the touchscreen, then the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen. Press the "Parkview Backup camera Delay" button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
· Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
4
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
"Rain Sensing" button on the touchscreen and make your
selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
· Hill Start Assist -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the "Hill Start Assist" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the "Lights" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the "Headlight Off Delay" button on the touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Headlight Illumination On Approach
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press the "Illuminated Approach" button and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Headlights With Wipers -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the "Lights w/Wipers" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
· Auto High Beams -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
· Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto High Beams" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to "Lights/Auto High Beams -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights
w/Lock" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
4
to return to the previous menu.
· Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, press the "Daytime Running Lights" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Auto Door
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locks" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
w/Lock" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Auto Unlock On Exit
· Horn w/Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock On Exit" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Flash Lights w/Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry Feature. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your selection, press the "Sound Horn With Lock" button on the touchscreen and select from "Off," "1st Press," or "2nd Press." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Horn w/Remote Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the "Horn w/Remote Start" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Remote Door Unlock
When "Remote Door Unlock" is selected, you may choose from "Driver" or "All." Select "All" to have all doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob. Select "Driver" to have the only the driver door open with the first push of the key fob.
NOTE: Passive Entry -- If Equipped. If "All" is selected, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door handle is grasped. If "Driver" is selected, only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped.
· Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off. Press the back
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Memory Linked to Fob -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the 4
vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Memory Linked to Fob" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location if "Memory Linked to Fob" is set to (ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Power Lift Gate Alert -- If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the "Power Lift Gate Alert" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Auto Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the "Auto Heated
Seats" button on the touchscreen, then select either "Off," "Remote Start" or "All Starts." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the "Engine Off Options" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Easy Exit Seats -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Driver's seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. To make your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seats" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay status press the "0 seconds," "45 seconds," "5 minutes" or "10 minutes" button on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
· Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the "+" or "" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Compass Settings -- If Equipped
After pressing the "Compass Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where 4
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
by pressing the "ON" button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Equalizer
Compass Variance Map · Perform Compass Calibration
Press the "Calibration" button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the "C" icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the "Speed Adjusted Volume" button on the touchscreen and select from "Off," "1," "2" or "3" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Surround Sound -- If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
· AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the "AUX Volume Offset"
button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu.
4
· Loudness -- If Equipped
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup -- If Equipped
After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
· Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
· Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select "Yes" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating settings reset to default. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
· Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the "Clear Personal Data"
button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?" select "Yes" to Clear,
or "Cancel" to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared". Press the back
4
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect®
8.4 Personal Settings
Press the "Apps" or the "Controls" button on the touchscreen, then press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
& Locks, Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option, press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
Display
After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings. To change Mode status, select from "Day," "Night" or "Auto" until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
· Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions.
· Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with
Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or
parade positions.
4
· Set Theme
This feature will allow you to choose a background theme for the display screen. The theme will change the background color, highlight color, and button color of the display screen.
When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and ""setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Set Language
· Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped.) Press the "Set Language" button on the touchscreen and then press the desired language button until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Units
When in this display, you may select to have the DID, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed between US and Metric units of measure. Press "US" or "Metric" until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed. Press the "Touchscreen Beep" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Controls Screen Time-Out
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the ability for the controls screen to time out. Press the "Controls Screen Time-Out" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, To make your selection, press the "Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Voice
· Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the "Brief" or "Detailed" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
· Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the "Always," "With
Help," or "Never" button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
4
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the "Clock" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS signal. To change the Sync Time setting, press the "Sync
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
time with GPS" button on the touchscreen until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or "" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The "Sync time with GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or "" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting. Press the "Time Format" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the "12hrs" or "24hrs" setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Show Time In Status Bar -- If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time Status setting press the "Show Time in Status Bar" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Forward Collision Warning -- If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press and release the "Near" or "Far" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
For further information, refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".
· Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking -- If Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional 4
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with Mitigation - Active Braking" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further information, refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· ParkSense®
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense® status, press and release the "Sound" or "Sound and Display" button. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to "ParkSense®" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.
· Front ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected from the Driver Information Display (DID) or Uconnect® System -- if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory
default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the "ParkSense® Front Chime Volume" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
· Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected from the DID or Uconnect® System -- if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make your selection, press the "ParkSense® Rear Chime Volume" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
· Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior side view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
activated in "Lights" mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When "Lights & Chime" mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When "Off" is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the 4
Blind Spot Alert status, press the "Off," "Lights" or "Lights & Chime" button on the touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To change the mode status, press the "ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE" unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into "PARK" or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the "Controls" button on the touchscreen, the "settings" button on the touchscreen, then the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen. Press the "Parkview Backup camera Delay" button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
· Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the "Rain Sensing" button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Hill Start Assist -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the "Hill Start Assist" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Headlight Off Delay
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the "+" or "-" button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Headlight Illumination On Approach
4
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the "+" or "" button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Headlights With Wipers -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Auto Dim High Beams -- If Equipped
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to "Lights/Automatic High Beam -- If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your selection, press the "Daytime Running Lights" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto High Beams" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
· Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights
with Lock" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Auto Door Locks" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
· Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To
make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock on Exit"
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
4
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
· Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Sound Horn With Lock
· 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the door locks are activated. To make your selection, press either the "Off," "1st Press," or "2nd Press" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Sound Horn With Remote Start
When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the "Sound Horn with Remote Start" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "All Doors," all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver's door opening. If "Driver Door" is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
· Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle".
· Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings 4
stored to a memory location (driver's seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.
· Power Lift Gate Chime -- If Equipped
This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is raising or lowering. To make your selection, press the "Power Lift Gate Chime" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
· Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection, press the "Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start" button on the touchscreen, then select either "Off," "Remote Start" or "All Starts" until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow/ Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
Auto-On Comfort -- If Equipped
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Easy Exit Seat -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seat" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay status press the press the "+" or "-" button to choose from "0 seconds," "45 seconds," "5
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
minutes," or "10 minutes." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the "+" or "-" button on the touch- 4
screen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Audio
After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
· Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to adjust, or tap the `C' icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
press the "Off," "1," "2" or "3" button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Equalizer
· Surround Sound -- If Equipped
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
· Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from 3 to +3. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
· Loudness -- If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
· Paired Audio Sources
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
touchscreen, then choose "Yes" or "No." Press the back to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
SiriusXM Setup -- If Equipped
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
4
After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth®" button on the · Channel Skip touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Paired Phones
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
This feature shows which phones are paired to the exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
· Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select "OK" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating settings reset to default.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
Clear Personal Data
System Information
After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button After pressing the "System Information" button on the
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- touchscreen the following settings will be available:
able:
· System Information
· Clear Personal Data
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data tion screen will appear displaying the system software
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove version.
4
personal information, press the "Clear Personal Data"
button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure Uconnect® RADIOS -- IF EQUIPPED
you want to clear all personal data?" select "OK" to For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
Clear, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the data has been cleared, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared."
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
1 -- USB Port 2 -- SD Card Slot 3 -- AUX Port
Media Hub
Located in the front storage area, this feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User's Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/ CD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in 4
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the top of the switch will "Seek" up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will "Seek" down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the center button will select the next available CD in the player.
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily "clear" by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
4
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display.
Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen -- If Equipped
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Climate Controls
1 -- RECIRCULATION Control 2 -- Front Blower Control 3 -- MAX Air Conditioning (A/C) 4 -- Temperature Control
5 -- Air Conditioning (A/C) 6 -- REAR DEFROST Mode 7 -- MODE Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
Front Blower Control
Air Conditioning Operation
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
There are seven blower speeds. Use (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is
this control to regulate the amount of engaged.
air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed
MAX A/C
increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position.
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the A/C is turned on automatically and the air is
4
Temperature Control
recirculated. NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Bi-Level Mode
Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode, as identified by the symbols, or a blend of two of these modes. The closer the control is to a particular mode, the more air distribution you receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
Mix Mode
Recirculation Control
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
window demist outlets. This setting works best in illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort, outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior
while reducing moisture on the windshield. Defrost Mode
rapidly upon weather.
initial
start-up
in
very
hot
or
humid
4
NOTE:
Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode with maximum blower and warm temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
· If the RECIRCULATION button is pushed when the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
· Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
· The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C button.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Windshield Wiper De-icer -- If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located at the base of the windshield.
The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically once the following conditions are met:
· Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold weather manual start with full defrost, the blower speed is greater than five, and when the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
· Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
· Activation By Remote Start Operation
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen -- If Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® screen.
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside ambient temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C) the
4
windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Re-
mote Start, the climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the
de-icer timer and operation will continue.
Stop/Start System -- If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls -- Buttons On The Faceplate
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls -- Buttons On The Touchscreen
Uconnect® 8.4 Manual Temperature Controls -- Buttons On The Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
4. Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
4
5. Rear Defrost Button
Push and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional push of this button, five additional minutes will be added to the timer function.
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: · Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. · Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. · Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Blower Control
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
7. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
· Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
· Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
· Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
4
· Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Climate Control OFF Button
11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen -- If Equipped
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
4
Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls -- Buttons On Your Faceplate
Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls -- Buttons On Your Touchscreen
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls -- Buttons On Your Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to "Automatic Operation" for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return to the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional press of
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the timer function.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
· Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
4
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
· Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
· Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
· Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
4
· Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
· Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0 Only)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
NOTE:
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
· If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
· If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of 4
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Windshield Wiper De-icer -- If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element located at the base of the windshield.
The windshield wiper de-icer operates automatically once the following conditions are met:
· Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during a cold weather manual start with full defrost, the blower speed is greater than five, and when the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
· Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically when the Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
· Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the outside ambient temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C) the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
windshield wiper de-icer is activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the climate control functions will resume their previous operation except, if the de-icer is active, the de-icer timer and operation will continue.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the 4
"AUTO" button on the touchscreen.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the temperature. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
· It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
· The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the Uconnect® customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the "Uconnect® System Settings" in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again. 4
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
A/C Air Filter
· Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods, as fogging may occur.
· Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for filter replacement instructions.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0 or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
Key Features: · 5" touchscreen · Three buttons on either side of the display
Uconnect® 5.0
Uconnect® 8.4AN
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a Uconnect® 8.4A system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts 4
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® Voice Command 1 -- Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text 2 -- For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For 8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions 3 -- Push To End Call
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
· Cancel to stop a current voice session
· Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
· Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system's status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect® 5.0
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453
4
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
454 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
· Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
· Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
and say "Help." The system will provide you with a list of commands.
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 455
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.
· Change source to Bluetooth®
· Change source to iPod®
· Change source to USB
4
· Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Media
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.
456 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
Phone
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands
· Call John Smith
· Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
· Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
· Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say "Call," then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "Call John Smith work."
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 457
4
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
458 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After the beep, say: "Reply"
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without me.
I'll be Late.
Okay. Call me.
Where are you?
Are you there yet?
I will be <number> minutes late.
I'll call you later.
I'm on my way.
I'm lost.
I need directions.
Can't talk right now.
See you in <number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 459
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
4
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Set temperature to 70 degrees
· Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
· Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
460 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button the beep, say:
. After
· For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: "Enter state."
· For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: "Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan."
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
.
After the beep, say: " Find nearest coffee shop."
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN)
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page.
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 461
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot*** **If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch 4
touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and confirm your personal email address. Then press Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from Uconnect® Access.
462 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and complete the easy online registration process to create a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to your vehicle.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with factory-installed Remote Start.)
Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
Mobile App
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 463
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect® to process your message.
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to 3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at mop- provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
arownerconnect.com.
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone number to receive a link to download the App on your
what you'd like to do. For instance, if you're happy with your message, after the beep, say: "Send."
4
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use your
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect voice to send a personalized text message.
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is TIP:
then connected to your mobile device.
· Not compatible with iPhone®.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
· Messages are limited to 140 characters.
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the beep, say the following command: "Send message to John Smith."
· The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature.
464 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
1. Press the "Apps" button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the "All Apps" button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the "Yelp" button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: "YELP
search."
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect® the place or business that you'd like Uconnect® to find.
Yelp®
SiriusXM Travel LinkTM (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel LinkTM is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:
· Show fuel prices
· Show 5 - day weather forecast
· Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 465
4
SiriusXM Travel LinkTM
466 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
Mon. Fri., 7:00 am 12:00 am, ET
© 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Sat., 8:00 am 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when you call.
Uconnect® System Support:
· DriveUconnect.com
· U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400
· Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
STARTING PROCEDURES -- GASOLINE ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not AUTOSTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode. .477
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 STOP/START SYSTEM -- 3.2L ENGINE . . . . . . .475 Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .479 5
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .479 System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED . . .480 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .483
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .484 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 When To Use 4WD LOW Range . . . . . . . . . . .505
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . .494 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Shifting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .507 Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . .511 Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
SELEC-TERRAINTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Safehold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .519 Rain Brake Support (RBS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .544
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .523 Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .546
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .547 5
Hill Descent Control (HDC) -- If Equipped . . .526 TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .552
Selec Speed Control (SSC) -- If Equipped . . . .530 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .533 Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .555 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Spare Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .581
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .564 Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .566 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .568
Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Premium System -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .574 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .590 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .590 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .606 5
Recreational Towing -- Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Recreational Towing -- 4X4 Models With 1-Speed Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Recreational Towing -- 4X4 Models With 2-Speed Power Transfer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES -- GASOLINE ENGINES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
· Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
(Continued)
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below 20°F Or -29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the 5
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
· Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
· If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to "Jump Starting" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting, "Extreme Cold Weather and Extended Park Starting procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, cycle the ignition to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
STOP/START SYSTEM -- 3.2L ENGINE
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce emis-
sions. The system will stop the engine automatically
during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the engine.
5
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE "Autostop" mode.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
· The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/ Start section. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
· The vehicle must be completely stopped.
· The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/ Start system may be viewed in the EVIC/DID Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine will not stop:
· Driver's seat belt is not buckled.
· Driver's door is not closed.
· Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
· Battery charge is low.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
· Accelerator pedal input.
· The vehicle is on a steep grade.
· Engine temp too high.
· Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept- · 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AU-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
TOSTOP.
· HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower · Steering angle beyond threshold.
speed.
· ACC is on and speed is set.
· HVAC set to MAX A/C. · Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP/START system going into a
5
· The transmission is not in a forward gear.
STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.
· Hood is open.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
· Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
· Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure. Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
· Fuel level.
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto- Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
matically While In Autostop Mode:
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
· The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
· The drivers door is open and brake pedal released.
· To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
· HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
· HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted.
· The drivers door is open and the drivers seat belt is unbuckled.
· The engine hood has been opened.
· A STOP/START system error occurs.
· Battery voltage drops too low. · Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
applications). · STOP/START OFF switch is pressed. · A STOP/START system error occurs. · 4WD system is put into 4LO mode.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the engine may require a manual restart and the electric park brake may require a manual release (depress brake pedal and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/ START system) the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and
back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
5
Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
STOP/START OFF Switch
2. The "STOP/START OFF" message will appear in Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Dis- The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
play (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" behind to the driver's side headlamp. Follow the steps
for further information.
below to properly use the engine block heater:
If the "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message appears in the EVIC, have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver's side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in place.
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits 3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
quicker starts in cold weather.
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the driver's side headlamp.
NOTE:
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
· The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer.
· The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
· The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.
WARNING!
· It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
5
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
· Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
· When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
· Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
CAUTION!
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
ing precautions are not observed:
position.
· Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
· Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
· Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the 5
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
Key Ignition Park Interlock
stopped or moving at low speeds.
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can only be
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. To activate ECO mode press the "Controls" button on the touchscreen and then press the "ECO" button on the touchscreen. When ECO mode is engaged a green light in the center stack of the instrument panel will be illuminated and a green ECO light will also illuminate in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). In 4WD models, ECO mode is only active in '4WD Auto' driving mode. If you switch to another driving mode the ECO button will turn grey and the ECO light in the instrument panel will disappear indicating it is no longer in ECO mode. It will automatically re-enable ECO mode when you switch back into 4WD Auto.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both beside the shift lever and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS shift control (refer to Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation in this section for further information). Moving the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the DRIVE position) activates ERS mode, displays the current gear in the instrument cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the highest available gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Gear Ranges
Shift Lever
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING! (Continued)
· Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
· It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
5
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
· Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
· When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
· Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-GoTM) in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
· Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result.
· DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
· When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
· Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
· With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
5
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" and "Towing A Disabled Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the "Transmission Temperature Warning Light" may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
"Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
SPORT -- IF EQUIPPED
This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power.
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch on the center console. Refer to Selec-Terrain in this section for
5
further information.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if you shift the transmission into 5 (fifth gear), the transmission will not shift above fifth gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Moving the shift lever to the ERS position (beside DRIVE) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever into the ERS position, then simply press and hold it forward (-). The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- 5
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold, this is normal. The torque converter clutch will function normally once the transmission is sufficiently warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) -- If Equipped
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4X4). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.
1-Speed 4X4 Switch
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) -- If Equipped
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
5
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
· NEUTRAL
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOW range position can be used to provide an additional gear reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in 4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components.
2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock) The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the normal driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons provide three selectable mode positions:
· 4WD LOW
· REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the normal driving mode at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD system mode position, see the information below:
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
WARNING! (Continued)
in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4WD LOW
5
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an additional gear reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels while providing maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
(Continued)
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Refer to "Selec-Terrain® If Equipped" for further information on the various positions and their intended usages.
Shifting Procedures
Shifting Into 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the "4WD LOW" button once. The "4WD LOW" indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete.
Selec-Terrain Switch
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met a message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with instructions on how to complete the requested shift. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Driver Information Display (DID) in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, and press the "4WD LOW" button once. The "4WD LOW" indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash and go out when the shift is complete.
NOTE:
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
· If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message
will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with
instructions on how to complete the requested shift.
Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) in "Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel" for further informa-
tion.
5
· Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may
occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop-
erly aligned. Several attempts may be required for
clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to
3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow
the shift.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the transmission to PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob.
Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System -- If
5
Equipped
Neutral Switch 7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
The Rear E-Locker System features a mechanical locking rear differential to provide better traction in the 4WD LOW position. The "REAR LOCK" button is on the Selec-Terrain Knob.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activating The Rear E-Locker
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the following conditions must be met:
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running.
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH (24 km/h).
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK button once.
Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the following conditions must be met:
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the REAR LOCK indicator light on.
2. The ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running.
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, press the REAR LOCK button once.
NOTE:
· It may also be necessary to drive slowly steering back and forth to complete engagement and disengagement of the E-Locker.
· When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain on.
· When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator lights in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash. When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK indicator lights will remain off.
· Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is for the vehicle to be rolling, below 15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right and left steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to align.
· The Rear E-Locker System must be disengaged prior to taking the vehicle out of 4WD LOW range. If 4WD LOW shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will flash from the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) with instructions on how to complete the requested shift.
SELEC-TERRAINTM
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Description
Selec-TerrainTM combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance for all terrains.
Rotate the Selec-TerrainTM knob to select the desired mode.
5
Selec-TerrainTM Switch
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec-TerrainTM offers the following modes:
· Auto -- Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive operation can be used on and off road. Balances traction with seamless steering feel to provide improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel drive vehicles.
· Snow -- Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather. Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission may use second gear (rather than first gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
· Sand/Mud -- Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or wet grass. Driveline is maximized for traction. Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin.
· Rock -- Off-road calibration only available in 4WD LOW range. Traction based tuning with improved steer-ability for use on high traction off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
· Sport -- This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power.
NOTE: SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is selected.
· Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped with the Off-Road package.
· Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control for steep downhill control. See "Electronic Brake Control System" in this section for further information.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional 5
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power (refer to "All Wheel Drive and Four-Wheel Drive Operation" in this section for further details). This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water:
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to "FourWheel Drive Operation" in "Starting and Operating" for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
5
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control if equipped (refer to Electronic Brake Control System in this section for further information). Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.
· Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
· Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.
· Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.
· Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
· After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
· If you experience unusual vibration after driving in 5
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If the "SERVICE POWER STEERING OR POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM" message and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
If the "POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED" message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE:
· Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.
· If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Parking Brake System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some additional features that make the parking brake more convenient and useful.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
· Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
· Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
ture in the customer programmable features section of the Uconnect® settings.
5
The parking brake switch is located in the center console.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate, however, it can only be released when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
Electric Parking Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake will automatically engage whenever the transmission is placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when the ignition switch is turned OFF. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the ignition switch is ON, the transmission is in Drive or Reverse, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made to drive away.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch down momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the car while the parking brake disengages. You may also notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
5
· Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
· When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
· Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGoTM in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
· Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake switch for as long as engagement is desired. The Brake warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park brake system is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is
turned "OFF". Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled 5
by customer selection through the customer programmable features section of the Uconnect® Settings.
Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safehold
Safehold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake System that will engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition switch is in RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the park brake will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met:
· The vehicle is at a standstill
· There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal
· The seat belt is unbuckled
· The driver door is open
For manual transmissions, the park brake will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met:
· The vehicle is at a standstill
· There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal
· The clutch pedal is not pressed
· The seat belt is unbuckled
· The driver door is open
Safehold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed, Safehold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for When brake service work is complete, the following steps
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
rear caliper bore. With the electric parking brake system, normal operation:
this can only be done after retracting the Electric Parking Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be
· Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through · Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
the Uconnect® Settings in your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you through the steps necessary to
· Apply the Electric Parking Brake Switch.
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
WARNING!
5
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order to be activated:
· The vehicle must be at a standstill.
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
· The parking brake must be unapplied. · The transmission must be in Park or Neutral.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
While in service mode, the Electric Parking Brake fault lamp will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system, the "Brake Warning Light" will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.
WARNING!
· Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
· Driving a vehicle with the "Brake Warning Light" on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle is also equipped with Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB) and Rain Brake Support (RBS). Further, all vehicles equipped with a twospeed power transfer unit have Hill Descent Control (HDC) and some vehicles may also be equipped with Selec Speed Control (SSC).
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type, and tires must be properly inflated, to produce accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
5
Significant over or under-inflation of tires or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow. This is normal.
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph (20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal.
WARNING!
· Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
· The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. · The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
CAUTION!
The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
· Do not "ride" the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.
· When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever possible.
· Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm-up, which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control. Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads, in close-quarter maneuvering, parking, or stopping.
· Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
build up between the tire tread and the road. This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction, braking ability, and control.
· After going through deep water or a car wash, brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action. Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds.
Traction Control System (TCS)
5
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the "Partial Off" mode or the "Full Off" mode. Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section for further information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in "Full Off" mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, 5
which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:
· The vehicle must be stopped.
· The vehicle must be on a 7% (approximate) grade or greater hill.
· The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
· For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance during acceleration on an incline while towing a trailer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
WARNING! (Continued) · Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
· If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
· HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Uconnect® Access Settings. Refer to
"Uconnect® Access Settings" in "Understanding Your
Instrument Panel" for further information.
5
(Continued)
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Hill Descent Control (HDC) -- If Equipped
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
Hill Descent Control
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
· Driveline is in 4WD Low Range · Vehicle speed is below 5mph (8 km/h) · Parking brake is released · Driver door is closed
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift lever. The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
· P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not activate
· R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
· N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
· 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
· 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
· 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
· 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
· 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
· 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
· 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
· 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
NOTE:
5
· During HDC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. During HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
· HDC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driver Override:
Disabling HDC
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
brake application at anytime.
following conditions occur:
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:
· Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application.
· Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
· Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
· The driver presses the HDC switch.
· The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
· The parking brake is applied.
· Driver door opens.
· The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
· The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
· Vehicle is shifted to park.
Feedback to the driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the SelecTerrain knob in the upper right position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
5
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to excess speed.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
Selec Speed Control (SSC) -- If Equipped
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
· Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
Selec Speed Control Switch SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
· Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h) · Parking brake is released · Driver door is closed · Driver is not applying throttle
Activating SSC
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
4WD Low Range Set Speeds
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once · 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
the following conditions are met:
· 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· Driver releases throttle
· 3rd = 4 mph (3 km/h)
· Driver releases brake
· 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
· Transmission is in any selection other than P
· 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
· Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
· 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
5
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the gear shift lever. Additionally, the · 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
SSC set speed is automatically reduced when climbing a · 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
grade and the level of set speed reduction depends on the magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC · 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h)
set speeds:
· REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
· NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
· PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: These SSC default set speeds are dependent on hill grade. That is the steeper the grade of the hill the vehicle travels on the lower the values of the set speed will be for all listed gears, with the minimal value being .6 mph (1 km/h).
NOTE:
· During SSC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for SSC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. During SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.
· SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode. This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:
· Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake application.
· Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
· Vehicle is shifted to park. Disabling SSC SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur:
· The driver presses the SSC switch.
· The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
· The parking brake is applied.
· Driver door opens.
· The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
· The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the state SSC is in.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for SSC.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the SSC switch but enable conditions are not met.
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to excess speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
· The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated brakes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in control-
ling vehicle speed when driving in off road condi-
tions. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
5
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
· Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
· Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when the TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent collisions. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system has up to three operating modes: "ESC On" "Partial Off," and "Full Off."
ESC On -- Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal mode for operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH range. The ESC system will be in "ESC On" mode whenever the vehicle is started or the power transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW range. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to "Partial Off" or "Full Off" for specific reasons as noted. Refer to "Partial Off" and to "Full Off" for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
Partial Off -- Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And FourWheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
The "Partial Off" mode is intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
The "ESC Off" button is located in the lower switch bank above the climate control. To enter the "Partial Off"
mode, momentarily press the "ESC Off" button and the 5
ESC Off indicator light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the ESC OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light will turn off. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
· When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated. When in "Partial Off" mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
· Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" button. Once the situation requiring "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
Full Off -- Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High And 4WD Low Range
The "Full Off" mode is intended for off-highway and off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions.
The "ESC Off" button is located in the lower switch bank above the climate control panel. To enter "Full Off" mode, press and hold the "ESC Off" button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate and an "ESC Off" message will appear in the odometer.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the "limited slip" feature described in the TCS section) until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically switches to "Partial Off" mode, described above. When the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system will return to "Full Off" mode. The ESC OFF indicator light is always illuminated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the "ESC Off" button. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. "Full Off" mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road use.
NOTE:
5
· "Full Off" is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW range.
· The "ESC OFF" message will display and a chime will sound when the shift lever is moved from any position
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the message was cleared previously.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles/kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
· The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
· Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
· The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off or full off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. When TSC is functioning, the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
Light" will flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
only active in the default "ESC On" mode. TSC can be
disabled by pressing the "ESC Off" switch and entering
"ESC Partial Off" mode. It is not active in the "ESC
Partial Off" or "ESC Full Off" modes. Refer to the ESC
portion of this section for an explanation of the different
ESC operating modes.
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
5
WARNING!
If the TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly, Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It is triggered by the windshield wiper setting and only functions when they are in use. When Rainy Brake Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
1 -- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 -- Size Designation 3 -- Service Description
4 -- Maximum Load
5 -- Maximum Pressure 6 -- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
NOTE:
· P (Passenger) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
· European -- Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
· Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
· High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
· LT (Light Truck) -- Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
R means radial construction, or
D means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
5
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: · XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or · LL = Light load tire or · C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
5
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
5
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occu- 5
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
· If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
· For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
5
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Safety
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
· Safety and Vehicle Stability
· Economy
· Tread Wear
WARNING!
· Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.
· Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
· Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
· Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
· Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
· Ride Comfort
WARNING! (Continued) · Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. · Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
· Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
· Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
Economy
Under-inflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
5
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
· Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
· Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure." Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
5
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:
· The tire has not been driven on when flat.
· The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
· The puncture is no greater than ¼ (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires -- If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires -- If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a "mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and 5
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires -- If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire -- If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
5
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
Full Size Spare -- If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare -- If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
WARNING!
5
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 -- Worn Tire 2 -- New Tire
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16" (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to "Replacement Tires" in this section for further information.
· Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:
· Driving style
· Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
· Distance driven
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicator." Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
· Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
5
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. · Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.
· Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer
· Use on Front Tires Only
· Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are recommended:
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
· Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/55R18 tire sizes are not chainable.
· The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with the use of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
· Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/60R18 tire sizes are not chainable.
· The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use of 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models with a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit
· The use of 7mm snow chains is permitted with 225/ 65R17 and 225/60R18 tires.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models
· The use of 9mm snow chains is permitted with the use of 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET31 wheels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
CAUTION!
· Use on Front Tires Only
· Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models may
result if tire chains or traction devices are used with
original equipment size tires.
· Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models with-
out a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit may result if
tire chains or traction devices are used with origi-
nal equipment size tires.
5
· Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk
Models may result if tire chains or traction devices
are used with original equipment size tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: · Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. · Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). · Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). · Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. · Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Observe the traction device manufacturer's instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer's if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
· Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
(Continued)
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation
method is the "rearward cross" shown in the following
5
diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the "forward-cross" shown in the following
diagram.
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
(Continued)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to "Tires General Information"
in "Starting and Operating" for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" to turn off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the "Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
5
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light." Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
but the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will still be on. In this situation, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
· The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) · After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
· The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
· The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
· Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
· The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the "Tire Pressure Monitor-
5
ing Telltale Light."
· Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
· Receiver Module
· Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
· Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a "LOW TIRE PRESSURE" message will display in the instrument cluster, an Inflate to XX message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the Inflate to XX message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
STARTING AND OPERATING 573
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the spare tire.
574 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound and the "TPMS Telltale Light" and "LOW TIRE PRESSURE" and Inflate to XX messages will turn on upon the next ignition cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the "TPMS Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound and the "TPMS Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the "TPMS Telltale Light" will turn
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System -- If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
· Receiver Module
· Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
· Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
· Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
STARTING AND OPERATING 575
The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
5
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver information Display (DID) will display a Tire Low message for a minimum of five seconds, an Inflate to XX message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the Inflate to XX message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
576 STARTING AND OPERATING
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the EVIC/DID will return to their original color, and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
STARTING AND OPERATING 577
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound and the "TPMS Telltale Light" will turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a Tire Low message, an Inflate to XX message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value in a different color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) the "TPMS Telltale Light" will
5
turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires.
4. The EVIC/DID will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in the same color as the other pressure values in place of the different color low tire pressure
578 STARTING AND OPERATING
value. The EVIC/DID will also display a "SPARE LOW PRESSURE" message to remind you to service the flat tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the "TPMS Telltale Light" will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC/DID will still display a different color pressure value and an Inflate to XX message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h), the "TPMS Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the "TPMS Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC/DID will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the "TPMS Telltale Light" will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses:
United States Canada
GQ4-61T 1470A-42T
STARTING AND OPERATING 579
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded "regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will
not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these 5
engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed
580 STARTING AND OPERATING
consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
3.2L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane premium gasoline for optimum performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and should be reported to
your dealer immediately. Engine damage resulting from operating with a heavy spark knock may not be covered by the new vehicle warranty.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline." Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol.
STARTING AND OPERATING 581
CAUTION!
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to illumi-
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a · Operate in a lean mode. fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
5
· OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
· Poor engine performance.
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may · Poor cold start and cold drivability.
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. · Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following:
· Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
582 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Change the engine oil and oil filter.
· Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance: · The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. · An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
STARTING AND OPERATING 583
CAUTION! (Continued)
· The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control 5
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
(Continued)
584 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: · Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE ONLY) -- IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING 585
5
E-85 Badge
586 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recommended.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
· You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when refueling.
· You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up.
NOTE:
· Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed, especially when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
· Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
STARTING AND OPERATING 587
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera- 5
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
588 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
ADDING FUEL
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforcement.
STARTING AND OPERATING 589
· Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located on the driver's side door trim).
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler cap.
NOTE:
· In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
· When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
· If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
CAUTION!
· Damage to the fuel system or emission control 5
system could result from using an improper fuel cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system. · A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on.
(Continued)
590 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) · To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top
off" the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
· Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.
· Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
· A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove access door located on interior trim panel for release cable with the tip of your key.
3. Grab the release cable tether and pull up to release the fuel filler door.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "CHECK GASCAP" message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
"clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
STARTING AND OPERATING 591
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
5
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
592 STARTING AND OPERATING
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
STARTING AND OPERATING 593
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
5
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
594 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition.
WARNING! (Continued) vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a weightdistributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
(Continued)
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING 595
Trailer Sway Control -- Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Weight-Carrying Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
5
is 10% to 15% for a conventional hitch. You must consider some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
Frontal Area
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
596 STARTING AND OPERATING
tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
· An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
· Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 597
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
5
Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
598 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/ Transmission
2.4L/Automatic with or without Trailer Tow Package
3.2L/Automatic
3.2L/Automatic with Trailer Tow
Package
Model FWD or 4WD
Frontal Area 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
Maximum GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Maximum Tongue Wt. (See Note)
200 lbs (91 kg)
FWD or 4WD FWD or 4WD
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg) 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
200 lbs (91 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to "Tire Safety Information" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 599
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
5
Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: · The tongue weight of the trailer. · The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle. · The weight of the driver and all passengers.
600 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
· When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
· Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always, block or chock the trailer wheels.
· GCWR must not be exceeded. · Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
STARTING AND OPERATING 601
CAUTION!
· Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
· Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
5
Towing Requirements -- Tires
· Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
· Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.
602 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
· Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper inspection procedure.
· When replacing tires, refer to "Tires General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Brakes
· Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
· An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
· Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
· Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 603
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into wiring harness.
the vehicles
5
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
604 STARTING AND OPERATING
1 -- Female Pins 2 -- Male Pin 3 -- Ground
Four-Pin Connector
4 -- Park 5 -- Left Stop/Turn 6 -- Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 -- Battery 2 -- Backup Lamps 3 -- Right Stop/Turn 4 -- Electric Brakes
5 -- Ground 6 -- Left Stop/Turn 7 -- Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 605
Towing Tips
Electronic Speed Control -- If Equipped
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission -- If Equipped
· Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
· When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The · Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid maximize fuel efficiency.
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Cooling System
5
Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
range.
heating, take the following actions:
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
606 STARTING AND OPERATING
Highway Driving Reduce speed. Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in PARK.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
5. Release the parking brake.
Recreational Towing -- Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
Towing with the front wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 607
Recreational Towing -- 4X4 Models With 1-Speed Recreational Towing -- 4X4 Models With 2-Speed
Power Transfer Unit
Power Transfer Unit
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer unit.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
The power transfer unit must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the power transfer unit selector switch. Shifts into and out of NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode position.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
5
· DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
(Continued)
608 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the power transfer unit.
· The transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing.
· Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under "Shifting into NEUTRAL (N)" to be certain that the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
· Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the transmission to PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 609
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
5
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Neutral Switch
610 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
· Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
· The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
· A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
STARTING AND OPERATING 611
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, press and hold the recessed power transfer unit NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector switch) for one second.
Neutral Switch 7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the power transfer unit will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.
612 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When shifting the power transfer unit out of NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
· Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
· The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
· A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .615 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .628
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .629
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616 Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
TIRE SERVICE KIT -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .618 Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .619 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .620 Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .622
Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 6
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .640 Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641 Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 RECOVERY STRAP -- IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .646
614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .648
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . .650
4x4 Models With 1Speed Power Transfer Unit -- With Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
4x4 Models With 2Speed Power Transfer Unit -- With Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank below the radio screen.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action.
· On the highways -- slow down.
· In city traffic -- while stopped, put transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage 6
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H," pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:
· If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
· You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque 100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
**Lug Nut/ Bolt Size
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/ Bolt
Socket Size
19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617
6
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
Wheel Mounting Surface
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each against the wheel.
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
TIRE SERVICE KIT -- IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼" (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Load Floor Handle
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
1 -- Sealant Bottle 2 -- Deflation Button 3 -- Pressure Gauge 4 -- Power Button
5 -- Mode Select Knob 6 -- Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 -- Air Pump Hose (Black) 8 -- Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and 6
turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode.
620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
· Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to "Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit" section (F) "Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement".
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
· The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.
· When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
· For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
· You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼" (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
· Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
· Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4" (6 mm) or larger. If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with 6
extremely low tire pressure. If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire. If the wheel has any damage. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
622 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
· Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source.
· A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
· Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle's Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 623
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
· Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire 6
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
· After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
624 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
· The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 625
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) "Drive Vehicle."
CAUTION!
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla- · The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
· Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle's inte-
6
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Tire Service Kit components which may cause
Kit.
permanent damage to the kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.
626 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(D) Drive Vehicle:
(E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to "Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit" before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air Mode position.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 627
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to (F) "Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement".
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
6
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle.
628 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING!
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.
· Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
· Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
· Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 629
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
the load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
6
Load Floor Handle
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
630 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener 4. Remove the chocks.
5. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
Jack And Tool Assembly NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place.
6. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 631
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel.
6
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
632 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: · Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. · Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. · Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. · Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK. · Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
· Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.
· Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
· If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
· To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 633
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly 6
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill cladding.
634 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jacking Locations
Rear Jacking Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 635
Rear Jacking Engagement Point
6
Front Jacking Location
636 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
Front Jacking Engagement Point 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 637
· For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
· Refer to "Compact Spare Tire" and to "Limited-Use Spare" under "Tires--General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for additional warnings, cautions, and information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward wheel bolts.
the
wheel.
Lightly
tighten
the
6
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
638 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to "Torque Specifications" in this section for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
Assembled Jack 12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 639
WARNING! (Continued) the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Stowed Tire, Jack And Chock
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
6
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
(Continued)
640 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to "Torque Specifications" in this section for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the means provided. Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 641
6
Positive Battery Post
642 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
· Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.
· Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
· Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition to LOCK.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 643
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle's engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal 6
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
644 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Press and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE, while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
· Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 645
CAUTION! (Continued)
· When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
· Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
NOTE: Press the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to place 6
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ESC Off switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.
(Continued)
646 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
RECOVERY STRAP -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery strap. Recovery straps do not act like traditional tow straps, chains, or winch cables.
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in emergencies to rescue stranded vehicles. Only use Recovery straps on vehicles that fit within the recommended GVW of your recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps to OE recommended anchor points or emergency towing anchor points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle tie down point, these are not designed for this purpose. Never attach to vehicle steering, drive train, or any other suspension components. NEVER pull a strap over sharp edges or abrasive surfaces that can damage the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged strap, it has reduced strength. DO NOT attempt to repair straps. ONLY persons involved in the recovery should be in either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone inside the vehicles can be struck by strap recoil, causing serious injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40 feet from the recovery area when using the recovery strap.
Using Recovery Strap
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 647
2. Apply the parking brake.
1. Review all warnings and instructions first. 2. Position the recovery vehicle. 3. Connect the recovery strap. 4. Add a recovery damper or blanket. 5. Clear the danger zone. 6. Safely and slowly start pulling. 7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both vehicle are
secure and parked.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully separate the shifter bezel and boot assembly from the center console bezel.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the shift lever override access hole (at the right front corner of the shift lever assembly), and push and hold the override release lever down.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
6
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever boot.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
648 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described under "Recreational Towing" in the "Starting And Operating" section.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF FWD MOD-
the Ground
ELS
Flat Tow
NONE
NOT ALLOWED
4X4 MODELS
1SPEED POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
2SPEED POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
NOT ALLOWED
See instructions under "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" · Transmission in PARK · Power Transfer Unit in
NEUTRAL · Tow in forward direc-
tion
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 649
Towing Condition Wheels OFF FWD MOD-
the Ground
ELS
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Rear
Front ALL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
4X4 MODELS
1SPEED POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
2SPEED POWER TRANSFER
UNIT
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED OK
NOT ALLOWED BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
6
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- position, not the ACC position.
ment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Shift Lever Override" in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle can be moved.
650 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
· Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
· When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models With 1Speed Power Transfer Unit -- With Key Fob
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
· DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
· Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or power transfer unit will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
· Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models With 2Speed Power Transfer Unit -- With Key Fob
The manufacturer recommends towing with all four wheels OFF the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 651
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a 2speed Power Transfer Unit may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), under the following conditions:
· The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEUTRAL (N).
· If equipped with an Automatic transmission, it must be in PARK.
6
· If equipped with a Manual transmission, it must be in gear ( Not in Neutral).
Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting and Operating" for detailed instructions.
652 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
· Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or power transfer unit will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
· Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .655 ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.2L . . . . . . . . . .656 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II . .657
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .657 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .660
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .668 Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 7
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Sky SliderTM Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724
Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk) . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . .725
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705 Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp . . . . . . . . . .726
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727
VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .728
REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . .722
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 2.4L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
1 -- Air Cleaner Filter 2 -- Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 3 -- Oil Fill Cap 4 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir
7
5 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 -- Battery 7 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir 8 -- Engine Oil Dipstick
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.2L
1 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 -- Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 3 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 7 -- Engine Oil Fill 8 -- Air Cleaner Filter
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)." It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
CAUTION!
· Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
· If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
7
"CHECK GASCAP" message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
· The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.
· The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed "Maintenance Schedule", there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
· Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Engine Oil Checking Oil Level
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
7
your engine.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) -- 2.4L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) -- 3.2L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
7
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the "dusty or off-road conditions" maintenance interval if applicable.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist should be used instead of a chassis hoist.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement
7
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should 1 -- Clean Air Hose Clamp
change your air cleaner filter.
2 -- Air Hose 3 -- Screws
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push in on the quick connect clip with your thumb and remove by pulling hose away from air cleaner filter cover.
3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Air Hose
1 -- Air Filter Cleaner Cover 2 -- Air Hose 3 -- Quick Connect Clip
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 -- Air Cleaner Cover 2 -- Air Cleaner Filter
4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly and install air hose.
7
Air Cleaner Filter
1 -- Air Cleaner Filter 2 -- Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.
· When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition switch position. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.
· You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
· Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)
· Rib or belt wear
· Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
· Belt slips
Maintenance-Free Battery
· "Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
position on pulley)
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required. · Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before
new belt is installed)
· Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
7
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to "Jump-Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.
· Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
· Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
· It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
· If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
· Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information.
· The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a -- If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other
7
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf -- If Equipped
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on the lower right of center console. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage 3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
panel
Console Closeout Panel
7
Hush Panel
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door out and lift up.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicators.
Air Filter Cover Location
A/C Air Filter
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash panel and console closeout.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:
· Wear Or Uneven Edges
· Foreign Material
· Hardening Or Cracking
· Deformation Or Fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
7
1 -- Wiper 2 -- Release Tab 3 -- Wiper Arm
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Release Tab 3 -- Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
7
1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Wiper Arm 3 -- Release Tab
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing The Front Wipers
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
7
1 -- Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 -- Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
1 -- Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 -- Wiper Arm 3 -- Wiper Blade
682 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 3 -- Wiper Arm 4 -- Wiper Arm Receptacle
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield and rear window washers share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
7
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
684 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
· Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
· The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 685
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
7
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
686 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
· Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
· Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
· Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 687
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System -- Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-
7
12106).
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
688 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
· We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
· Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34° F (-37° C) are anticipated.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 689
· Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
· Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
7
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
690 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
· Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
· Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
· Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 691
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
7
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
· Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
· Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
· If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
· Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
· Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
· Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
· Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the "Brake Warning Light" is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 693
should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.
WARNING!
· Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or
7
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
694 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
· To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
· Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer's recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 695
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the 7
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
696 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Sky SliderTM Top Care
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended. Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance, and make successive cleaning easier. Do not subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the top and tracks. Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the top and inside of the tracks by hand with an alcohol dampened cloth.
Washing
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth system is preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid pointing a high-pressure hand held spray wand directly at the sides of the top, as this can damage the seal and force water past the weather strips.
General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles. If Hand Washing:
· Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun. · Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 697
· Allow the top to dry before opening. Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the tops drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete streaks in the material.
· Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your local authorized dealership for further suggestions.
· Wash the top with a soft, natural bristle scrub brush,
CAUTION!
and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish washing
soap. Do not use detergent.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-
· Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing.
vents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before opening
7
· Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap it.
and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces.
Additional Cleaning Procedure
For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
stains, apply MOPAR® Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
698 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
equivalent to the complete stain, extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle brush, scrub in all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is still apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the stain is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with warm water. Let the top dry before opening it.
Protection
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect the acrylic (cloth) top periodically. A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard® is suggested. The top should be clean and dry before application of the protectant.
CAUTION!
Avoid getting Scotchguard® on the surrounding weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to these items might occur.
Weather Strip Care
Lubricate the weather strips periodically with MOPAR® Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent, to keep them soft and pliable.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are: · Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
· Stone and gravel impact.
· Insects, tree sap and tar.
· Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
· Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 699
Washing
· Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
· If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
· Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
· Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
7
700 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
· Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
· If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
· It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
· If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
· If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
· If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
· If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
· Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
· All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
· To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 701
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel's protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure -- If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
7
· Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
· Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
702 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
· For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
· For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
· Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use protectants or other products, which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 703
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
7
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
704 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
FUSES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 705
WARNING!
· When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
· Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
7
· If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
706 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity F06 F07
F08 F09 F10
F11 F12
F13 F14
F15
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 707
Description
Not Used Powertrain Control Module PCM Engine Control Module (ECM) Not Used Power Transfer Unit (PTU) If Equipped
Not Used Brake Vacuum Pump - If
Equipped
Engine Control Module (ECM) 7
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) / Power Take-Off Unit (PTU) / Brake System Module (BSM) If Equipped Not Used
708 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23
Blade Fuse 20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan 70 Amp Tan
F23
50 Amp Red
F24
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
Description
Powertrain
Not Used
Not Used
Starter Solenoid
A/C Compressor Clutch
Not Used
Radiator Fan
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 2
Voltage Stability Module (VSM) Feed #2 - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Rear Wiper -- If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Cavity F25B
F26 F27 F28
F29 F30
F31 F32 F33 F34 F35 F36
Blade Fuse 20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 709
Description
Front Washer -- If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Fuel Heater - Diesel Only
Not Used
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Not Used
Engine Control Module (ECM)/(EPS)/(PCM)
Not Used
Not Used
7
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
710 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F37 F38 F38
Blade Fuse
F39
F40
F40
F41
F41
F42
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green 20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
60 Amp Yellow
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
Description
Not Used
Not Used
Glow Plugs (Diesel Only) - If Equipped
HVAC Blower Motor
Trailer Tow Park Light - If Equipped
Headlamp Washer Pump - If Equipped
Body Controller Module (BCM) - Feed 1
Voltage Stability Module - Feed 1 - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Trailer Tow Electric Brake Module
Cavity F43 F44
F45
F46
F47
F48
F49
F50 F51
Blade Fuse 20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 711
Description
Fuel Pump Motor
Trailer Tow / 7-Way Connector - If Equipped
Passenger Door Module (PDM) - If Equipped
Sunroof / Skyslider - If Equipped
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
Driver Door Module - If
Equipped
7
Power Inverter (115V A/C) - If
Equipped
Power Liftgate - If Equipped
Not Used
712 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F52
Blade Fuse
F53
F54
F55
10 Amp Red
F56
15 Amp Blue
F57
20 Amp Yellow
F58
10 Amp Red
Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink
Description
Front Wipers - If Equipped with Stop/Start Engine Option
Brake System Module & Valves
Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3
Blind Spot Sensors / Compass / Rearview Camera / Trunk Lamp With Flashlamp Charger
- If Equipped
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/Electric
Steering Column Lock (ESL)
Trailer Tow Lights Left - If Equipped
Occupant Classification Module
Cavity F59
F60 F61
F62
F63
F64
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 713
Description
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) If Equipped
Power Outlet - Center Console
Trailer Tow Lights Right If Equipped
Windshield de-icer - If Equipped
Front Heated Seats - If Equipped
Heated Steering Wheel If
Equipped
7
714 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F65
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red
F66
15 Amp Blue
F67
10 Amp Red
F68
Cartridge Fuse
Description
In Car Temperature Sensor / Humidity Sensor / Driver Assist System Module (DASM) /
Park Assist (PAM) - If Equipped With Stop/Start
option
HVAC (ECC) / Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
In Car Temperature Sensor / Humidity Sensor / Driver Assist System Module (DASM) /
Park Assist (PAM) - If Not Equipped With Stop/Start
Option
Not Used
Cavity F69
F70
F71
F72 F73 F74 F75 F76
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 715
Description
Power Transfer Unit Switch (TSBM) / Active Grill Shutter
(AGS) - If Equipped
Intelligent Battery Sensor If Equipped with Stop/Start
Engine Option
HID Headlamp Right if Equipped with Stop/Start
Engine Option
Heated Mirrors - If Equipped
Trailer Tow Back Up - If Equipped
7
Rear Defroster
Cigar Lighter
Rear Differential Module (RDM) - If Equipped
716 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F77
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red
F78
10 Amp Red
F79
10 Amp Red
F80
20 Amp Yellow
F81
F82
F83
F84
F85
F86
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
Description
Fuel Door Release/Brake Pedal Switch
Diagnostic Port
Integrated Center Stack (ICS) / HVAC / Aux Switch Bank
Module (ASBM) / Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
Radio / CD - If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Engine Controller Module (Gas)
Electric Park Brake (EPB) - Left
Not Used
Horns - If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
Cavity F87A
F88
F89 F90 F91 F92 F93 F94
Blade Fuse 20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 717
Description
HID Headlamp Left - If Equipped with Stop/Start En-
gine Option
Collision Mitigation Module (CMM) / Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart Camera Module -
If Equipped
Headlamp Leveling - If Equipped
Not Used
Power Outlet Rear Not Used
7
Brake System Module (BSM) Pump Motor
Electric Park Brake (EPB) Right
718 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F95
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red
F96
10 Amp Red
F97
10 Amp Red
F98
25 Amp Clear
F99
F100
Cartridge Fuse
Description
Electrochromatic Mirror / Rain Sensor / Sunroof - If Equipped / Passenger Window Switch /
Power Outlet Console
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) / (Airbag)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) / (Airbag)
Audio Amplifier - If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 719
Cavity F13 F32 F36 F38 F43 F48 F49 F50 F51 F53
Blade Fuse 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 25 Amp Clear 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 10 Amp Red 7.5 Amp Brown
Description
Low Beam Left
Interior Lighting
Intrusion Module/Siren If Equipped
Deadbolt All Unlock
Washer Pump Front
Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right If Equipped
7
Lumbar Support
Wireless Charging Pad If Equipped
Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors If Equipped
UCI Port (USB & AUX)
720 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity F89 F91 F92 F93
Blade Fuse 10 Amp Red 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 10 Amp Red
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may:
· Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
· Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Description Door Locks Driver Unlock
Fog Lamp Front Left Fog Lamp Front Right
Low Beam Right
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Cargo Lamp Overhead Console Lamp
Reading Lamp Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps Front Fog Lamps Front Side Marker Lamps
Front Fog Lamps (Trailhawk)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 721
Bulb Number TL2122
PLW2142A WL2122
Bulb Number
HIR2LL
D3S (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
7
WY21W or 7440NA
H11LL
194
PSX24W
722 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail/Turn/Stop Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Back-Up Lamps License Plate Lamp
Bulb Number LED ( Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
W16W or 921 W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps -- If Equipped
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 723
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to gain access to the headlamp bulb cap.
3. Firmly grasp the cap and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Firmly grasp the bulb and connector assembly and rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Install the bulb cap in the headlamp housing and 7
rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.
724 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Turn Signals And Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the upper lamp assembly on the passenger side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then remove the bulb and socket assembly from the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Re-install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the 3 hex head screws from the wheel liner.
2. Pull the exterior edge of the liner towards the tire to gain access to the bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb's socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the into the fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Install the 3 hex head screws into the wheel liner.
Front Fog Lamp (Trailhawk) 1. Unlock lower access door in wheel liner. 2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb. 3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp. 4. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 725
5. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog lamp housing until it locks in place.
6. Lock the lower door in the wheel liner.
Bodyside Mounted Back-up Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the screws that fasten the tail lamp housing to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from housing.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb and install the socket.
726 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Reconnect the electrical connector. 9. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and screws. 10. Close the liftgate.
Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamp 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
6. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp.
7. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. 8. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket. 9. Connect the electrical connector. 10. Reinstall the trim panel and the lower trim. 11. Close the liftgate.
3. Once the trim is loose, pull it back exposing the trim panel.
4. Using a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver, open the trim panel exposing the back of the liftgate lamp.
License Plate Lamp
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Pull bulb from socket, replace, and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.2L Engines
15.8 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
5.5 Quarts
3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
7.2 Quarts
3.2 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
10 Quarts
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 727
Metric
60 Liters
5.2 Liters 5.6 Liters
6.8 Liters
9.5 Liters
7
728 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine Component Engine Coolant
Engine Oil 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil 3.2L Engine
Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs 2.4L Engine Spark Plugs 3.2L Engine Fuel Selection 2.4L/3.2L Engines
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
87 Octane
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 729
CAUTION! (Continued) · Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. · This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
7
730 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis Component Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATFTM Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
I
N
T
E
CONTENTS
N A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .732
Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734 N C
E
S C H E D U L E S
8
M 732 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
N T
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
E indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
N remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
A N
scheduled maintenance.
C E
Based
on
engine
operation
conditions,
the
oil
change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
S vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
C H
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
E cold ambient temperatures will influence when the "Oil
D Change Required" message is displayed. Severe Operat-
U L
ing
Conditions
can
cause
the
change
oil
message
to
E illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
S reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
8 within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
· Check engine oil level.
· Check windshield washer fluid level.
· Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
· Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
· Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 733 M
A
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil I
Change Indicator System:
N T
· Change oil and filter
E
· Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
N A
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator N
system turns on.
C E
· Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
S
C
· Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses H
and park brake
E
· Inspect engine cooling system protection and
D U
hoses
L
· Inspect exhaust system
E S
· Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or 8
off-road conditions
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
M 734 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A I
Maintenance Chart
N
T
E
N Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
A
N C
Or Years:
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
S Or Kilometers:
C
H Additional Inspections
E D
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
U Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends, L and replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E S
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8 Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
X
X
X
X
X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs 2.4L Engine **
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 735 M
A
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000
I
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
N T
E
Or Years:
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
A
32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000
N
Or Kilometers:
C
E
Replace spark plugs 3.2L Engine **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
X
S
C
X
XH
E
D
X
U
L
E
S
8
M 736 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I N
WARNING!
T E
· You can be badly injured working on or around a
N motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
A have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N C
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
S C
· Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
H hicle could result in a component malfunction and
E effect vehicle handling and performance. This
D U
could cause an accident.
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .739 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .742
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .739 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .743
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .740 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .743
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .740 In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743
In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .744 9
738 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .745
Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .745
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .745 Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .746
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 739
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
9
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the
740 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
· If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
· Authorized dealer name · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) · Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (877) 4265337
· If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 4652001 English / (800) 3879983 French
· Owner's name and address
· Owner's telephone number (home and office)
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 741
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 9
4652001 English / (800) 3879983 French).
742 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 743
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 18883274236 (TTY: 1800424 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
9
roadsafety/
744 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
· 18008904038 (U.S.)
· 18003871143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
· www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 745
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and 9
746 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
748 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .191 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .688 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Front Passenger Knee Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Lighter Weight Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Occupant Classification Module (OCM) . . . . . . . .71 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .664 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Alarm Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698 Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .426
INDEX 749
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .302 Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 10
750 INDEX
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727
Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .699 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .658 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Child Restraints Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .109 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . .108 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . .100 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .95 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
INDEX 751
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .690 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690 10
752 INDEX
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .688 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698 Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Cupholders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Door Locks Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Driver Information Display (DID) Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Driver's Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .302
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .187 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .286
Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Emergency, In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .658 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
INDEX 753
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 10
754 INDEX
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702 Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .728 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
INDEX 755
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
10
756 INDEX
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .174 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .174 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523 Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702 Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Key Fob Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
INDEX 757
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Keyless Enter-N-GoTM Lock The Vehicle's Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 10
758 INDEX
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .339 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .177 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .339 Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
INDEX 759
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675 Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .339 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .744 Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 10
760 INDEX
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657 Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .548 Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .302 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Sunroof (Sky Slider) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
INDEX 761
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .22
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .690 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 10
762 INDEX
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Shifting into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . . .608 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .608 Shifting out of Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . .611 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .611 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Remote Control Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .422 Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . . .33 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Roof Sky Slider Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696 Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732 Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .60 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .63 Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .65 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .64 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
INDEX 763
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .60 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 10
764 INDEX
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selec-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728 SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .744 Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Power Transfer Unit, Shifting into Power Transfer Unit Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728 Specifications Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .422 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720
INDEX 765
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .66 Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .436 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .547 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 10
766 INDEX
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .745 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .606 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Transfer Case Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .288 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .22 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
INDEX 767
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .393 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .745 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
10
768 INDEX
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .699 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Wireless Charging Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle's electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle's electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
1155WKLK7744-112-162-A6B-AA
SFeicrosnt dEEdditiitoionn
PrriinnteteddininU.US..SA.A.
Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows)